Home

2012 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual

1. 493 Hi jack Gelei ux o 099 9 2758 3190 BR ore Bae 494 O Spare Tire 5lOWBPE aas chaecdwonitauas 494 El Preparations FOr Jacking 244 KEER mta 495 O Jacking INSteuCHONS a m bies 2am eae een da 496 O Road Tire Installation 500 B Jump Starting Procedures 500 O Preparations For Jump Start H Jump Starting Procedure la Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped ll Shift Lever Override Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle D Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob o Four Wheel Drive Models 492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
2. ak E Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 514 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 514 N Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PrO T s 4 on Peau d a nee e aod dos Sb ee EDE 515 W Replacement Parts sie pes RE v 516 W Dealer Service si EE 000006 516 Bl Maintenance Procedures 517 ATO EO i52yaceu se ees MED AA VARS 518 O Engine Ou Pitter san oec doe eg EER N 220 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 914 ca es RR ER DI 521 O Maintenance Eree Battery vivas da ie as 521 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 525 E Body Lubrication 2 9a S3 RE SERERE o Windshield Wiper Blades o Adding Washer Fluid 24 zudem 525 O Exhaust Systemi 2062642444246 RAP EERS 026 Cooling System 24 39onxeqcau Rr ERA ES 528 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EL Brake ste 32456 die PERD ASE ER da 534 W Bulb Replacement 555 H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 536 sisi Ar rnm 555 o Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual n Front Park Turn Signal 2s oue RES 056 Ee RE EG ii O Front Side Marker sgh ex ye bees RA ee 056 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 538 oFront Fog Lamp sees 557 EIranciel Case 4444454556554 4055 8 eno os 539 7 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup O Front Rear Axle Fluid 540 IAW 426 EED EE EE esos TS TP RS 557 D Appearance Care And Protection From H Center High Mounted Stop Lamp COMOSION a ee ehh ee eas EX x3 ENS 540 CEDVISE 2444 sh4e0e6 RE ER
3. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound IN The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument c
4. system will need to be replaced aun tw Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power ac lU AA adii p 034633690 E vi EL outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the Front Power Outlet fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited in the power outlet it heats when pushed in and pops out Warranty 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer there is a third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area 072736476 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer Opt 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin Rear Power Outlet If Equipped NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e mobile phones etc Eventually if plugged in lo
5. Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil message is displayed Depending on operating conditions the message may appear as early as 3 500 miles 5 630 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Tr
6. To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two cold lower holes on the dipstick with 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the fluid at approximately 80 F 27 C If the fluid level is correctly established at 80 F 27 C it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid tem
7. N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is end
8. Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the N button to begin After the Ready prompt and
9. The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ignition for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals when alarming The horn will sound the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeat edly for three minutes If the disturbance
10. 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 14 Release the parking brake 15 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post 490 STARTING AND OPERATING M Shifting Out of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Reconnect the negative battery cable 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 5 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 6 Press and hold the brake pedal 7 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 8 Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL N turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 9 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in Neutral 10 Release the brake pedal 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 12 Start the engine 13 Press and hold the brake pedal 14 Release the parking brake 15 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 492 B If Your Engine Overheats 492 N Jacking And Tire Changing
11. 2 32 sq m 453 kg AWD 3 6L Manual Two Door 6 329 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 lbs 91 kg Sport Model 2 871 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 5 AWD 3 6L 3 73 Two Door 6 353 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 lbs 91 kg Automatic Sport Model 2 881 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 4WD 3 6L Manual Two Door 5 430 Ibs 25 sq ft 1 000 lbs 100 Ibs 45 kg Sahara Model 2 463 kg 2 32 sq m 453 kg 4WD 476 STARTING AND OPERATING Engine GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GIW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 6L Manual Two Door 6 430 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 lbs 91 Kg Sahara Model 2 916 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 4WD 3 6L Two Door 6 454 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 lbs 91 Kg Automatic Sahara Model 2 927 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 4 10 2 Door Rubi 6 507 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 lbs 200 lbs 91 kg con Model 2 951 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg AWD 301 7 4 10 Two Door 6 533 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 lbs 91 kg Automatic Rubicon 2 963 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg Model 4WD 3 6L Manual Four Door 5 742 Ibs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Sport Model 2 604 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 4WD STARTING AND OPERATING 477 Engine GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GIW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 6L Manual Four Door 8 242 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs SportModel 3 738 kg 2 97 sq m
12. BENE eee err ee eee es ee ee O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire E Trachom Grades 24x33 bos He DER tarit SE 587 Quality Gades cot is et Re hee ee eae Be 587 oO Treadwear eet be eae Oe DES OES HESS EO 587 Temperate Grades 24 acme ec oe ee IR 2 a 588 N FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its au
13. Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Play
14. MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with
15. OFF dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 30 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is run ning the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 31 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appro
16. Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol base engine cool ant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixi
17. or Robert instead of Bob N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported beg
18. 1 587 kg 159 kg AWD 3 6L Four Door 8 257 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 lbs 350 lbs Automatic Sport Model 3 745 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 4WD 3 6L Manual Su Four Door 5 782 lbs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Sahara Model 2 623 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg AWD 3 6L Manual 3 79 Four Door 8 282 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 lbs 350 Ibs Sahara Model 3 757 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg AWD 3 6L Four Door 8 297 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Sahara Model 3 763 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 4WD 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GIW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 6L Manual Four Door 8 406 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Rubicon 3 813 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg Model 4WD 3 6L 4 Four Door 8 431 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 lbs 350 Ibs Automatic Rubicon 3 824 kg 2 97 sg m 1 587 kg 159 kg Model 4WD Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo ie the GVWR and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the
19. Automatic Oil Change Indicator 295 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 363 Automatic Transmission 386 536 Fl id dad Filter Cranges sie uas mi Roe sr De 536 Fluid Level Check 537 PI Type oso ske ESE OE RA RP 536 Special Additives dcs note pt eee es eh TRES 536 AMON K sirr 43939909 AE ST AN S 392 N INDEX 591 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 166 Auxiliary Power Outlet i12 eet ehe d 166 Pe WOK P 398 Dalley sees eben ASE RA DRA ERROR ESE as p21 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Belts Seat gatareneee EES OER ne Pets Was eee 48 89 Body Mechanism Lubrication 524 Brake Assisi Dysief sis ons pas Bere RED ees 423 Brake Control System Electronic 422 Bike SEE oo di pc oc MEE GODE oa hee 534 JU DOCK ABS sex hn beatae advan e 420 Master C vlinder issues ne antti na 534 ESSEN RE EE TEEL A17 Matie LIE ME DD 274 Brake Transmission Interlock 386 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 87 Bulb Replacements ii ss a9 346944 ER bina 554 555 Bulbs EISE oie bee RERO ds he ee eA EA 91 Calibration Compass xs bant e54sayseos 289 298 Capacities PIU sees SE HIED oe MERRIE 558 Caps Filler PUGl EEE TE 466 oneer less Susu ia dus 2 pura xq Canoes 417 Cat Washes EE 541 Carbon Monoxide Warning 88 466 Cargo Vehicle Loading 2 9 i444 SERE thee 468 si Ed D EE teary ase es
20. CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD A Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button
21. Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 112 000 miles 182 000 km Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km L1 Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary I Inspect the CV joints L1 Inspect exhaust system m m a E Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575 128 000
22. Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC A dy m O INTRODUCTION Z rri X REEDE e e Ls Le UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ce ce ec ccc wee ee ewww i sesse STARTING AND OPERATING 44 39 ROLE OU Un see EONS RS ged ECO N TABLE OF CONTENTS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee tn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 22 sesse sesse CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 5 i Vehicle Identification Number 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION NEE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle
23. If more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed Enabling HDC 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operat ing for further information 2 Press the Hill Descent button The Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will turn on solid NOTE If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Disabling HDC 1 Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of 4WD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn off 436 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 064902773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standa
24. NS TA TING AND OPERATING 455 CAUTION Continued e Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on O
25. Never at tempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down stream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is NS TA TING AND OPERATING 415 always a good idea to check for damage That way you e After extended operation in mud sand water or can get any problems taken
26. Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of f
27. Recreational Towing in the Starting And Operating section Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS See instructions under Recreational Towing e Automatic Transmission in PARK Flat Tow e Manual Transmission in gear NOT in Neutral e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED dai NOT ALLOWED Flatbed BEST METHOD N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509 Proper towing or lifting eguipment is reguired to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other eguipment designed for this purpose following eguip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION e Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing If the vehicle being towed requires steering the
28. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 379 CAUTION If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a erounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray The engine block heater must
29. SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System f Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the
30. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device 047440820 Center Console USB AUX Connector Port NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod9 USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Brows
31. System Aine so ne ete eder fp ORC ROUR E 19 N INDEX 605 Theft Systemi Disarming sae ESE gee oe DE ERA 20 Tit oieetige CO 33 9 2 9 39 949408 Bee d 162 TiO Olt E P EETITITT 9d Tire and Loading Information Placard 441 442 Tire Identification Number TIN 439 Tite Eis si asco qos senate SOROR EE es Be 436 Tine Safety IMOMNaUON ses acm SEE DRAAD PTS T 436 i rm 91 445 587 il Tes uod vceurewbeseiueg gs 446 eun ECT takes ee pasa eas 454 S rni APP PORT OER oe ees 493 Compact opare skik SELA ER 449 General InfoEHidllOB skete po viene es 445 PGW Deed ack is ER tug Sheek eee 447 Inflation Pressures sasasi poo pase awe Red 446 Ee SEE vasa eee eee eee vue 493 497 Load Capa 3242443 ederis HEM RE 441 442 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 456 Pressure Warning Light 24340444 beet ee 4 278 Oil GIOI sspe reringa aa 587 KAE se 40s oe bia Se HAD nod GROND EE 448 Replace MEn MEC E DM qM es 452 IG ale 4 oo geen ak os aaa ees oe ON 455 DIE Bou wala ee EE eee Reed e a adus 436 o5 av 437 pate lite si bs seo anes Sees eee ee es 494 DDIN IBIE as pei SALES ES EE OOS 450 Tread Wear Indicators og de cede esses 451 TO Open HOO segge RE EE ea Ren 151 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 479 low Hooks Emergency 4 tere DES Re Rs 505 jo c APP EDE a 471 508 24 Hour Towing Assistance 116 Disabled Velicl scacsoiued e ne A Roe xs 508 en XM eee a atone Recreational ip ATP DD ee oe Tow
32. ee The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited
33. i corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 036007402 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 13 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 035905867 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 036007406 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 036007407 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear at the lower left corner of the rear window opening window The spongy part of the seal should be down and Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned pone outward to seal with the swing Ee den closed before zipping to prevent damage 036033904 17 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and posit
34. phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile pho
35. seconds until the current variance zone number is dis played To change the zone press and release the STEP button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 2 Press and hold the RESET button for approximately 10 seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the RESET button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the digits will go blank while the history information is erased The averaging will re
36. sion shift the transmission into first gear And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in N Neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Continued Continued 482 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage ratings are not exceeded before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 1 GVWR Information in Starting and Operating for the 2 GTW proper inspection procedure 3 GAWR When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti mation in Starting and Operating for information lized This requirement may limit the ability to on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carry weight as a percentage of total trailer weight ing capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Op
37. the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are
38. these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
39. vacd oa 6058 e408 WH HRS HE 170 Jack OCHO sr sesse SOLA HAARD ER Rd 494 Jack Operation sacaeeeenean dteded ad 493 496 497 Jacking INSHUCTIONS aue 6 05 2403 eic URP te pi 496 JUMP Dring uasa seek gage AE CRUS AR ES 500 Key li Reminder os sees 246 Sri arbor deena eae oa 15 koy Tron OUDE eee 3 V ea a A di b Kev Replacement x 2 escudo ed d ARA OR B i Key Sentry mio DIN ZOE s ceu Vi e Bei trs 16 Kevless But SYSE eu dea reposo RU atra eed 22 i am 14 Lane Change and Tum Signals 270 Lane Change ASSIST 5 264 pur EUR ASES ESTE oO 155 E c Tr 48 598 INDEX NEE Id L p Shoulder BENS s eae n E SARA EYE sane 48 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHUJE seve oo nacatee oes Ai RR ee nase 78 80 indi AA eee ede N EE ee Bees 91 Lead Free Gasoline 0 000 eee 462 Leaks Fluid RR AR RE ER N EE N 92 EIGhUDUlbs 2425 s aos Sea ttn eae tegen 4 aban cues 91 Bite ho EE ee EO EE ee 91 152 PULA AE ARE WES ET Ee 67 71 89 276 AE oet 6 944 Oa RE C IU doe Coos Be 277 PIDIELO6K s ce meo sopa Eee Oe Oe Se d 275 Anti Lock Warning ua RE REED SEER ER 275 PACU D se e ea e eaa Hu ea ee boe eee So 557 Brake Assist Warning 005 432 Drake WONING ie ae Re Rm mad Mu ii oe Nod 274 Bulb Replacement 52522464242 4440000825 505 RARR OE EE EE EE eee ees 157 Center Mounted SOP sa 9 2454045265 ES 555 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 283 ur er erara a 278 Daytitae RUS aug oe ER beh Bee RE RE 157 Dimmer Sw
40. 157 Cellular Phone eene 101 358 Center High Mounted Stop Light 558 erte dom Lapel sspears HER E ILC RR REPAS 468 Chains Tire 22222 dm uo SR pm Re 454 Changing s Fiat Tre fey ete ye exin tiati 493 Worl DE SIZING 22 daaog ac detenti RR G08 Aaa ed 437 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator I5 A CC TT 283 515 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 87 Checks Safety 592 INDEX M Child Restraint iis oe Re Ee VR EE RR 73 76 80 83 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 78 80 Cald diet LOEKS DM 40 Child Seat oe 3o09 9 9 2 Sor RUP WR S ney n SOR GU bees Cleaning hg EE EE SEK EE EE ON 543 Climate Control aus esce nerit pEr EA Sr 358 ISO 4 63244 STORET EEEREN EEEE E 307 326 335 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 358 Compact pare DIS us sca aot ded KIES ho Ha 449 dopo ART EE 4 TIT 286 289 297 Compass Calibration ausa ute ke pec E is 289 298 Compass Vadan uae ps reeda AE eN 288 298 Computer Trip Travel uude EXE ce cR gd 286 296 Connector WG yak a eee eee SACRATA SEIS 349 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 349 Gone EERDER GEEL eee eset see 173 Console Floor s 2 6849 SEA eR RATES 173 Contract Service 4 544 444 5454 56 d oko eds 583 CODO SIE 44 04 RARR PEER Beas ees a 528 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 530 Coolant Capacity as cac adage Hee OE RO 558 Coolant Level 2405 4vee bau REED eee eens 532 Disposal of Used Coolant 6 Drain
41. AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when
42. Back View Of Steering Wheel 045033001 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc
43. CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C LL OO C O O G C C CO L L L L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 104 000 miles 169 000 km L1 Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary L1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
44. Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 EVIC Units Selection UNITS IN Display Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features Press and Release the SELECT button to toggle units between U S and METRIC System Status Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning Messages stored Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OXK is displayed will do nothing Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Warning Messages stored Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRES ENT is displayed will display each stored warning for each button press Press and Release the MENU button to return to the Main Menu Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the DOWN button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip funct
45. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle top 036007402 NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift unless the hard top is being installed To remove the the top swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage ae e 035963570 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 15 Fold back the front section of the top pulling the 16 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as fabric rearward Gently rest the header on top of the rear shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two portion of the deck folds da 035963571 036007405 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 17 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch 18 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted disengage Repeat this step on the other side brake light Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along the door frame track to the rear
46. FEE PSX24W Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 2 9157 Front Side Marker Lamps 2 168 Headlamps 2 rear as Soe DEd OP Bo eo oe ee His Rear Stop Tail Turn Lamps 2 2 oss es sesa 9157 License Lamp se ses osse ede bag REED eh RS 194 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Headlamp 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counterclockwise 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee 8 Pull the bulb from the housing 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock position 10 Remove connector from bulb 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the connector locking ta
47. Flasher 2e a qure peso E rw 492 Head Restraints ds on ean ER KERSE R Y eh ae es 145 lead Nests osse bp eee oe ea et doe s 145 Headlights PUlD ASe pene ave 4425 ode p trisi D99 Dimmer SW o aan SARA oe Os EDE 155 Ie ed ER EE pd ree 955 OWN AE EE N ele v Eod E 153 Pe eds fede a a DERE 144 P MA EARE aS 339 Heater Engine Block seses ones a a 3 nen 379 High Beam Indicator siste RENS cheng titt 273 Hill Descent Control seses dene eee RAD areri 434 Hill Descent Control Indicator 434 PU DUAR SEE koe ekke 65 4S PAPERS HE EE 423 Hitches Talr TONE rr 474 N INDEX 597 Holden Cup 5454555550 46 4 2o05 ARS E esos 172 Hood Release 4422430048 ne eed ke hes 151 idiolek GIG aes 2 9 dono Ses OS ER 538 egies ee eee ee 14 i T 14 IBmBol Key Kem val ass paces RE ods d vq 14 INNATE FOUY uus a thee eee B ER ee s 21 Tminobilizer Oel t Key e sewu yd dod wes sees 16 Infant Restraint llle 74 Inflation Pressure Tires SS SS ss 446 Information Center Vehicle LL 292 Inside Rearview Mirror ss 98 Instrument Cluster 4 6 66i 4444444 66650 5 271 Instrument Panel and Controls 270 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 544 Integrated Power Module Fuses 548 Interior Appearance Gale ses eee ES ES 543 ono LIBI seen reese ee AE RAD ED d 157 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 160 ROJU UON vets gees eased Hea poops ee OR DE Inverter POWE
48. INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Command System No function If Equipped ed For the radio Refer to Voice Command in the SIES EE N Made Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further A details m Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Press the TIME button to change the display from Manual located on the DVD for further details elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds Ope
49. INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Cu
50. In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped shift transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493 WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or co
51. In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Power Disc Brakes Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wr
52. Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips
53. Menus 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel this is where the compass sensor is located 6 7 8 Compass Variance Map 040506040 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 To Change The Compass Variance 1 Turn the ignition switch RUN it is not necessary to start the engine 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper va
54. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator anti freeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade perfor mance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable
55. Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position l 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the rocker lever rearward unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the instru ment panel below the radio Press the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the window U 021933670 Power Window Switches The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window NOTE The switches will continue to function for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned to the LOCK position or until a front door is opened 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Four Door Models The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down f
56. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Never place or install floor mats or other floor inoperable coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter Floor Mat Safety Information fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out
57. S A WARNING oueres mse BOG ASAT MAN DADE AIC ELF ARE 2 A MISEEN GARDE Z5 DyTDP LEE WADER WEN AFIUFTIE O LA VITEDEE DEIN T VERS UOS UM el aA a REAA DA L AUTORUN Pa TE PLU AARPALUE V ELA RR C MTS Chk vel IG OFS MA mL VER lie On AGAER S FN 010308790 Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION M Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of eguipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 OGCRD eo Ad 6 2B mm BUGKDAw wae 2O BOS HSA Ses wD e t 0 OG se c3 p y 9 A m e hs Am we sol o amp QA T C E EM E BR o o0 s 8 MALFUNCTION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLISENTAL PREERWGER KA Asan COMPAR GOMVERTERE ngen BEE DOWNERS Am ELECTRONIC INGERIG UGN el TEMP TEMPERATURE NESTWAINT SYSTEM MRAAG OFF TO UP MANUALISQ DOWDITIOM
58. The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear b
59. They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VE
60. To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to a complete stop Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the STARTING AND OPERATING 383 driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE The knock over prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into RE VERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Continued 384 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed WARNING e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is
61. Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be guickly re moved by tuming the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer
62. a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position Four Door Models Only If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever allow the belt to retract fully the 60 rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents I someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt WARNING when the rear seatback is not fully latched A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and NOTE leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts out check that the rear seatback is fully latched Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc e If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center
63. a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the body side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews rubber seal at the top of the windshield 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body cde bchinc ihe doorepen ae 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both Door Frame Installation Four Door Models on N peat Oit oer IOS 1 Install the rear door frame first AO 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door opening 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to rubber seal at the top of the windshield pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 6 Clip the front of the door rail o
64. accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Continued WARNING e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to Air Bag Warning Light protect you Do not modify the components or You will want to have the air bags ready to wiring including adding any kind of badges or inflate for your protection in a collision The stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal upper right side of the instrument panel Do not circuits and interconnecting wiring associated modify the front bumper or vehicle body struc with air bag system electrical components While the air ture or add aftermarket side steps or running bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of boards the following occurs have an authorized dealer service You need proper knee impact protection in a the air bag system immediately collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
65. and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to pl
66. and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 t
67. and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment behind the Power Distribution Center 002 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ee WARNINGE is 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park WARNINGS the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNING moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn plosion the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503 CAUTION Failure to f
68. any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Raising The Soft Top 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame windshield frame in this section for further information ores 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link Sunrider Models only 035907428 5 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows latches to the door rails Sunrider Models only UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 6 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches ee 7 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of 8 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be panels over the rear roof bow clipped to the shortened rail edge NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 9 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body 10 To install the s
69. are located on the sun visors To use the mirrors rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for 3 supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites E e www chrysler com uconnect Vanity Mirror e www dodge com uconnect Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al e or call 1 877 855 8400 lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your e www jeep com uconnect 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices t
70. are not met The stabilizer sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal driving conditions WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main taining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return to off road mode To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off road position Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on
71. audio information ECO display If Display Fuel Saver is selected as ON only the ECO message will display in the audio information ECO line of the display If Display Fuel Saver is selected as OFF only the audio information will display in the audio information ECO line of the display when the audio system is on To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO Operating Instructions Radio Mode RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER l MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate IMPIIS Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio ru Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Media Center 230 REQ Press and release th
72. bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Inflator Units If Equipped The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags Inflator Units if equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts front and side impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to certain impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deploy
73. button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and screens have been viewed the last INFO button press holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW will go back to the play mode screen on the radio button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat holding the FF gt gt button OH NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 e Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de List Or Browse Mode vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described each track in the current list and then forward to the below will bring up List mode List mode enables next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the desired track when it is playing the track press the audio device SCAN button again During Scan mode pu the e TUNEcontrol knob The TUNE control knob functions lt lt SEEK an
74. calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 Reception Ouality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or alon
75. cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you WARNING When your child restraint is
76. clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition to the ON RUN position without starting the engine engine Off 3 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remove the shift lever override access cover located on the PRNDL bezel Shift Lever Override Access Cover WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver or similar tool reach into the opening and press and hold the shift lever override 6 Move the shift lever to NEUTRAL 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover 508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under
77. defroster button is located on the CAUTION bottom right side of the blower control knob Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster the heating elements An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth For an additional five minutes of operation press the and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to button a second time the heating elements Labels can be peeled off NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear after soaking with warm water window defroster only when the engine is operating Do not use scrapers sharp Instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS MM Instrument Panel Features 270 Mi Instrument Cluster 271 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 2 2 N Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 286 A Control DORS oue d ac e dete 8558 tenes 287 O Compass Temperature Display 288 O Trip Conditions sase seias HERRIE 291 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC LEPPE sae vo
78. door frame 035963572 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 19 Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track 21 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps and lower the top down into the vehicle provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera body tion 035963573 20 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the 22 Close the front header latches bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion 23 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle Frame in this section for further information 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Putting Up The Soft Top NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion 035963573 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door 6 Ensure that
79. e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the ignition key Once the ignition key is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Continued fob from t
80. engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils Synthetic engine oils can be used if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded
81. far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Messages e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the VR button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish
82. for further information 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped REAR This light indicates when the rear axle lock has Q been activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi wee tion If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE As the coolant temperature gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H In this case the indicator light will flash continuously and a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi CAUTION eo mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security Driving with a hot engine cooling system could alarm is arming and then will flash slowly damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads until the vehicle is disarmed H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with
83. four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is Continued first turned to the ON RUN position 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e Ho
84. frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped he antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWH Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 12JK72 126 AD 4th Edition Printed in U S A
85. front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 480 STARTING AND OPERATING ie NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Op erating for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the correct fluid type CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 50
86. fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove Cartridge fuse J13 in the Power Distribution Center PDC labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD and store it in a safe location within the PDC e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Auto Trans Indicator Lamp ese Gave baw 658 Heater Control Lamps 2 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp Rear Window Defogger and Rear Wash Wipe i Soundbar Dome Lamp Bulbs only available from authorized dealer N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 Exterior Lights Backup Lamps 2 Bulb Type 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 1 LED FOO LADDI BART de DT
87. h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 451 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 452 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is ne
88. improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones Continued 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Control ESC Trailer Sway Control TSC and Hill Descent Control HDC All of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions and are commonly referred to as ESC WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle nor can they increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressur
89. indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming proce
90. into this mode Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the vehicle with the shift lever in the PARK position vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an atte
91. is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located on the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 sec onds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm is successfully set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle Sec
92. light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 12 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light O After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If the light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting And Operat JJ ing 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION 13 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle
93. lower the top the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation E 81927762 TT ES ET 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Install rear corner panels 3 Rotate the header forward 036107424 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 4 Engage the header latches 5 Install the side and back windows 036007407 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 4 Bow 5 Sail Panel 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window 8 Check Strap 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window O14 WN HM Zipper Start Zipper Finish Swing Gate Bar Swing Gate Brackets Sail Panels UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft on the windshield frame top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dea
94. made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 EM and 12 Satellite if eguipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to sw
95. member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top Grit may scratch the window has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Continued 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Continued WARNING e Do not lower the top with the windows installed EE valida wih the tear window Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor mation It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result curtain up unless the side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the vehicle The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protec
96. might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch seat and next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the uu webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap ps IN U T d N l Zi 022640822 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle _ S EY Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder buckle nearest you A belt that is loos
97. must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on an 8 or greater incline 3 for manual transmission equipped vehicles e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE automatic transmission equipped vehicle and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE forward gears and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short period while in NEUTRAL regardless of clutch p
98. of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING Continued e Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exteri
99. of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the d
100. of the soft top 81925d12 NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14 Completely release the latches from the loops on the unless the hard top is being installed To remove the windshield frame If your vehicle is not equipped with swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward the Sunrider package proceed to Step 15 while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle Cee to disengage VEREER ee ee ie ae 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 15 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over 16 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sun the Sunrider link Sunrider Models only rider Models only 81c65d28 17 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Ls ee E ES ft NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion 19 Close the front header latches 20 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door 18 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the MA RE an an ia M bows and as far inward as possible This will keep
101. off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and rad
102. on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed If the temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 CAUTION Continued WARNING Continued e Refer to Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models e The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor mation It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the
103. only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 396 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer ca
104. open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
105. opened High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released Front Fog Lights O The front fog light switch is located on the multi function lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control
106. or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the 72 000 miles 117 000 km engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect all door latches for presence of Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km whichever grease reapply if necessary comes first Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect the front and rear axle fluid damage
107. or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 407 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle w
108. overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The
109. recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 562 O Required Maintenance Intervals 564 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary
110. reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as EF identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Q7 Air is directed through the windshie
111. that 5 5 y a8 there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install the right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order 035707996 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Front Panel s Installation With Rear Hard Top NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly Removed to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the 1 Turn the left and right panels over and move the panels are sitting flush with the body spacer block located on the rear of the panel upward 90 degrees 2 Install the right panel first then the left panel 3 ET 3 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal ae in reverse order M Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near the top of the door using a 035707391 740 Torx head driver Four Door Only 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard 6 Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a the vehicle 40 Torx head driver 5 Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the re
112. the air bag covers These items may cause serious injury during in flation Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Continued 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB If Equipped during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats q b 022633807 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Location When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Ba
113. the assist strap and are fully latched firmly lock the seat into position 030939158 3 Return the seat to the normal position 1 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 and 2 under Fold And Tumble Rear Seat in this section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 2 Press down on the release bar on each side and pull Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models the seat out and away from the lower bracket Reverse the steps for removing the seat 3 Remove the seat from the vehicle WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the ve hicle e The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models 030939159 P To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be Release Bar Location folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE To Fold Down The Rear Seat e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to Locate the pull strap lower outboard side of seat and reposition the front seat to its mid track position pull it toward you until the seatback releases e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward T
114. the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 021733799 Door Strap Harness Location 1 Harness Connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap 4 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage the paint 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 With the door open lift the door to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when removing them To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor Hinge Pin Screw 3 Slide the front seat s fully forward 4 Remove the trim access door from the bottom of the B pillar Trim Access Door 5 Unplug the wiring harness connector NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red
115. the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once The in dicator light will illuminate Press the 0350058840 switch a second time to turn the power inverter outlet off NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter indicator light turns ON WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console Rear Cupholders y STORAGE Glovebox Storage Front Cupholders The lockable glovebox storage compartment is located on Rear Cupholders the passenger side of the lower instrument panel Pull The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center outward on the handle latch to open the comp
116. the top locks into the Sunrider locking frame tracks and slide the top forward mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 81926dc3 ee EEN na 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the 9 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side bow until it rests on the windshield frame 036107424 side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches EES S 10 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of 11 Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow clipped to the shortened rail edge 036005872 Blps4abe Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See roof bow 4 bow will aid in reaching the channel with 12 To install the side windows affix the window tem the retainers porarily by attaching it to the Velcro in the upper rear
117. the two boxes that contain the following items e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window e Two rear window roll up straps NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 e Two Sunrider secure straps if equipped e Two rear swing gate brackets 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket V QW N screws two per side using a 130 Torx head driver p FO E O S se 4 Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE To aid in disconnecting the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet af 035605928 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three 31928508 Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installa 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the tion in this section pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a 130 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Installing The Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first t
118. the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with gs the Mode control dial Press this but a ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected ME mr e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside con
119. the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle till the tire is raised from the surface of the road Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca Lug Nut Installation tions WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 12 Remove blocks from wheels do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug n
120. them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps 10 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove the retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center console or securely behind the rear seat NOTE It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed 11 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 12 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts th rubber hood bumpers 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 13 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 1 Raise the windshield 2 Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars earlier in this section e Reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 3 Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield frame e Install the top two hex bolts 13 mm first then the lo
121. this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M This feature allows an iPod or external USB device tobe Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device plugged into the USB port located in the center console Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices
122. to extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range CAUTION Do not use 4L Low range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement Driveline hardware dam age can result Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultane ous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud And Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momen tum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause sk
123. to push 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming latch Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood and turn signals The lever is located on the left side of To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood the steering column panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031407547 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Headlights And Parking Lights NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain weather Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent conditions Turning the headlights on will usually accel for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to erate the clearing process the second detent for headlight operation 031407548 Headlight Switch 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off accord
124. to send the message to N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 T5 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Where are you 4 I need more direction Oe LOL 6 Why 7 I love you 8 Call me 9 Call me later 10 Thanks 11 See You in 15 minutes 12 I am on my way I ll be late Are you there yet Where are we meeting Can this wait Bye for now When can we meet Send number to call Start without me 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Bluetooth Communication Link Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the the system from announcing the new incoming mes Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection sages can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in e Press the amp button Bluetooth ON mode e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing gency English p Uconnect Francais Last See Enter Enter Number Se
125. top may result WARNING e Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are also re moved Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers Continued CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Continued 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM ee eee CAUTION Continued Refer to Lowering The Soft Top in this section for e Careless handling and storage of the soft top may further information damage the seals causing water to leak into the 1 Remove the side and back windows vehicle s interior e The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 2 Release header latches from the windshield frame 3 Release the Sunrider latch both sides 81925914 PT cia T cus 81c65d28 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Open the swing gate and lower the top Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top Refer to Raising The Soft Top in this section for further information NOTE Ensu
126. wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km I Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables Replace the spark plugs Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the
127. with Traction Con trol or Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system WARNING OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or CAUTION even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or Ist gear and REVERSE with manual transmission do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result 6 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast hida 3 Dod ME ES d may lead to transmission overheating and failure your VAE S EUP pen WIU ON OOS AE A mounted in the front and the rear It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use transmission shifting occurring both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle 506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand
128. 0 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 WARNING WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmis can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to the brakes axle engine transmission steer ing suspension chassis structure or tires
129. 0 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Sa oe e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original NOTE equipment tires and wheels The TPMS pressures e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care have been established for the tire size equipped and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or failure or condition sensor damage may result when using replace ment equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire Continued tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure
130. 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 440 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the side
131. 2 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the
132. 396 Four Wheel Drive Operation 394 Four Way Hazard Flasher 222405 2x x eR 492 Freeing A St ck Vehicle usuario RR es 504 Front Axle Differential sis wes eR EIS 540 l1 P 462 Ethan vous wee ues qe duce Vu x Pes 463 Piller Cap Gas Cap vase 3 dem goes tatii 466 fg sine h Se eyo oOo Pea oes Boe 462 fou 272 Motetials Added sesi ves n RS ema he e 464 Methanol 22 RO RIET IE A63 Ocene IS BE sa one HARDER SE ME RUP EE 462 Kees eens 444645704 clive BEE ete es 958 lank CApdCy a seus Ro PEG DORS HERE 558 Fuel System Caution ua oue voe E49 ceeee s 465 467 lap cr 048 596 INDEX NEE Id Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 242444 ex9e4 466 468 514 Gasoline Fuel 2223493594 ERA 933 eRe HES 462 Gasoline Reformulated 462 Gauges Coolant lemperalure a uicacech du et ok 2d POGI D 272 Song Sous soas ARE EL DRAKE DOE 280 DOC CCOMCC ss EES uet D dre toe eae E 272 T RONCE TM c AD HE 2 6 Gear Ries ser nee eo esau es ne DR es 381 387 Gear Select Lever Override s uas e RR LY eni 506 General Information 19 132 461 dss Elanie PER 544 Gross Axle Weight Rating 469 472 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 469 471 SEE EN pes bee sa ae N 469 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 101 Fiat Op ses 6 640055 hone ees A IE ole oe 179 Hard lop Kei aii 852 55 OR DR eens hous 187 Hard Top Modular lt a ss spar ED Se RE hens ee es 179 Hazard Warning
133. 428 024 ERROR HEERSER IE EE 198 225 pare Tie uice dudas dolus ens soa ee 449 450 494 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 32 254443 X VR ae eG 462 EE TR SEE EE ene ee anew 519 Speed Control Cruise Control 163 DPCCOOMEl space issida eur DA ER een ED RR 272 Sr MAREE IE RE eee NE EER 376 Automatic Transmission 376 so EE io eau a oe Bt oes ea be ee 377 Engine Block Heater 0 0 379 Engine Fals t OH La za woe Bet oe ede ao 377 Manual Transmission 376 Remote SS SS ee eee ar Steering VOWED ie 444 Beas Ged dE EE E bd RES 416 417 Tilt Column ss xues x3 Sues ebb eee SS 162 Wheel WG user eR AE RES ees 162 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 356 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Codi RC 356 DIOE d odesana ds Kon don da as VOR ER dcs 172 554 Storage belund tie Deal sis sos 9 Sua et eae es 179 DIOLd5 6 VENICE sets EKEN AE eee atin Sot s 368 554 Stone Kour VEDICIS supe a tas AARD feces 554 oek FECE 1232892449452 4 DAE DERS 504 DUBIE 542 499 mue nis Oe he he err 251 254 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 60 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 400 Owo Gale REUT ausa svt SE RESTER EN Y ES 44 Syste KEMO Dt BE sees a x s e a A x oe 27 TAMNOWIGIEE i es dobarsra g dot deg PIE dede 3 eode d 276 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 363 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 277 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 78 Th
134. 6 Power Door acea Ed REOR V Re CHO CREE 38 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LAICH sio sou OE EE SU N 78 80 Lubricaton bod miss we 3 9099 SEER davon ds 524 Maintenance Free Battery 914414 4s0eatveea ws 52 Maintenance Procedures leen 517 Maintenance Schedule 562 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 283 515 Manual Transmission 380 538 Fluid Level Check 4 5 voces 046445 Rs 539 Lubricant Selection 00 538 ORI peeds 43 4439 93 9 99 3 93 199 Shes 381 Manual Service 0 ee ee eee 585 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 534 Methanol 2 6 end oh a ER EO TT OE he os BS 463 Mini Trip Computer 34329939944 286 296 Anna lt 4 564 HARTE eee HE SINE PEE EE 98 600 INDEX M Electric Powered 4 4544446644454 EER 100 Electric Remote eren 100 SUD ECNRREETTTTTTSIICTIDO TORTE 98 Rearview AM 98 NONE g254 400 A605 09 ees da eee AE 100 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Modular Hard lOp scs 3 524 01 3 14 oe PR oe 8 po 179 Monitor Tire Pressure System esse sewe se 456 MODA Edits os coe ten Vara See eee ee 3e 516 584 MTBE ETBE 644644440460 ae Esada Sie Sie 463 Multi Function Control Lever 152 New Vehicle Break In Period 87 Occupant RESTADIS zi se aor se Re ao o9 gees 45 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 462 Odometer iss 9924 RE HO RES oS es 280 286 TENES beck et e
135. 9 and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchor age The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchor ages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recom
136. AREA OT OES EE AE N eae E 407 SA el oi gues os tea poe OE SS 409 Driving Through Waler esce eme ege 412 O After Driving Off Road i s ap RR E anes A14 la Power Steering ss ee ss ss ee 416 H Power steering Fluid Check iue Va RE as A17 aM Parking Brake 2s ue oed Rd RR ci A17 Bl Anti Lock Brake System 420 N Electronic Brake Control System 422 o Traction Control System TCS 25 v cmm 422 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 373 G Brake Assist System BAS 423 W Tires General Information 445 O Hill Start Assist HSA 0 423 O line PYessure 4 ics e kaap eo ae S 445 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 427 B Tire Inflation Pressures 446 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 428 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 447 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light G Radial Ply Vives e 253 deus tae Penson et 448 And ESC Off Indicator Light 432 3 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire O Trailer Sway Control TSC 433 And Wheel If Equipped o Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 434 0 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped N Tire Safety Information 436 A Pull Size Spare I Equipped suum rs 449 bue Mark ES ss sok xe 2455 AE es 436 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 450 O Tire Identification Number TIN 439 a Dire MS sepesi m eaa 450 O Tir
137. Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants e Bird droppings Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint of the doors rocker panels and tailgate are kept clear finish and open CAUTION e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result
138. Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are
139. Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level when shifted into any position other than PARK auto trans mission or when the vehicle begins to move manual transmission UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE The Daytime Running Light on the same side of the vehicle as the active turn signal will turn off auto matically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Interior Lights The overhead light will turn on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The sports bar reading lights available on four door models can be turned on by pressing the switches located on either side of the lens Press a switch a second time to turn the light off 031434793 Rear Cargo Light When a door is op
140. Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 1st gear and REVERSE with manual transmission Using mini mal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505 NOTE If your vehicle is equipped
141. E distance to empty These messages can be cycled through by pressing the STEP button on the steering wheel To reset the AVG ECO or ET press and hold the STEP button for approximately three seconds Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler Uconnect gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE e A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the center of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 Compass Variance Map UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 To Set The Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the RESET button on the steering wheel for approximately ten
142. ER BTABE TY CONTRO OFF 010533317 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears underbody on the right side of the frame rail near the center of the vehicle as well as on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment a 010834612 NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate EE INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 14 Hlenition Key Removal 54 242 aa 0 55 A844 14 O Key In Ignition Reminder 15 SG Key Pr 16 El Replacement Keys o ouem EO ERE SE EA
143. Flush and Refill iis soas se EE WE 529 INSPCCHOM aa dois LARGE HARE Ra ADS 528 Points to Remember 559 Pressure Cap ua e acu ay mac e SUP op cones 531 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 529 558 Corrosion Protection 24 4446440449 nee RR D 540 Crise Gh RE EE TE RAUS S ERR E P 278 CUPNOIGEIS sa na whee eee ede ee eee Rd E ED 172 Customer Assistance eee 581 Data Recorder Event 0 0000048 72 Daytime Running Lights 4 os 49 os 9 RES 157 Dealer Service llle 516 N INDEX 593 Defroster Rear Window 265 Defroster Windshield 90 361 366 Delay Intermittent Wipers 2g os ae 160 Diagnostic System Onboard 514 Dimmer Switch Headlight 2x buie aem s 195 Dipsticks Oil EROSIE ss some de HERPES ages 518 Power SICCIING sis 2a 56455 PRES 42454 A17 Disabled Vehicle TOWING 245 s were SEED d TES 508 Disarming Theft Syste sessies bes BAR aas 20 Disposal iis 3 23 393949 rir aias 520 Used Coolant Antifreeze 592 Door DOK etiese 22 595 x Vae iod SE 36 Door Locks Automatic SS 39 IDUOIS aA AG yee eae EA REESE S EAE 3l Drivers Seat Dack TE uu s vd s qp hd dira 140 DIMAS PPP ee eee eb ee G4 402 OIL avVemelit us ea 209939 29 8 err S d E 402 MPO 5247445455 EE 998 CR EE 402 Dual ID ss bek v Ed P EUR des f a S SUPR 174 Electric Remote Mirrors 04 100 Electrical Outlet Auxili
144. HICLE 527 CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut
145. Jeep 2012 Wrangler OWNER S MANUAL Includes Wrangler Unlimited VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drink ing don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu J Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC
146. K position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumin Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the SELECT button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Display Units In The EVIC can be changed between English and Metric units of measure The units apply to the Outside Tem perature Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until U S or METRIC appears Nav Turn By Turn If Equipped When on enables display of Navigation System street name turn direction and distance to turn information in the EVIC To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the compass outside temperature
147. Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L LL LLLL LL Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Inspect all door latches for presence of greas
148. NFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 041041987 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Compass Heading N S E W NE NW SE SW ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 e Outside Temperature F or C e ECO Display e Fuel Economy e Miles kilometers To Empty e Timer e Display Units Selection e System Warnings Door Ajar etc e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 041035449 The system allows the driver to select information by EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering MENU Button wheel Press and release the MENU button to advance MENU the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu features or to return to the Main Menu from a sub menu Upon reaching the last item in the 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press and release COMPASS Button Press and release the COMPASS button to G return to the Compass Outside Temperature Audio Information ECO screen whenever the current display is not the Compass Outside Temperature Audio Informat
149. OH 138 LO5V ENY aua RE EET EE EE 141 Fold and Tumble Rear 147 Head Restraints 0 0002 eee 145 LIGMOU ARE SE ARE AE eee ENEE 144 Heicht Adjustiment ze seke Mar oars 139 Rew VOWS 24 RE ESE ye eas 149 REMOVAL SERE 646544805444 EET DA 148 149 Seatback Release aus voa Re DE BE N awa ER x 140 TUS ae eee eg ET 140 Secun Against Thell 222222 b 493 anipige s 19 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Selection of Oil ss 254 fu ea HEER ER HE 519 Sentry Key Immobilizer 143 2 gd RE SACRE RES 16 Sentry Key Programming s sise ane ete ee oS 17 Sentry Key Replacement 5444454644 ARE RE 17 Service Assistance eee eee 581 Service Contract nss eed diie t Ee eee ws 583 Service Manuals eee es 585 Seting Hie CIOCK aie dea uh da ees 307 326 335 Setn Personal seers SR KA ETER poe oe ead 301 Shift Lever Override ix uus m ed ER RD RES oS 506 Juni isi EA 6 6264 bees 383 Automatic Transmission 383 Manual Transmission 380 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutal N C 488 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 226 adore pub bees oes 4445 490 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 54 Shoulder Dells ia SELLE EER iyis PER S oe Ra 48 MCC MOS io 24 ELE oe a ee ER SAD HOOR ES 68 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 369 Signals Turn 604 INDEX aa Id Snow Chains Tire Chains ES SS se 454 DOM log ao
150. ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 DOORS CAUTION Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped Grasp the half door window and pull upward Upper Half Door Window 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with the pockets in the lower door 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated Front Door Removal WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor Hinge Pin Screw 3 Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instru ment panel by pressing the tab at the top of the connector and pulling to disconnect NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch down until you can only see the latch on one end top of the connector This will unlock
151. PARK and manual transmission must be placed in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recreational towing CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer Continued case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case e Automatic transmissions must be placed in the PARK position for recreational towing e Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not in Neutral for recreational towing Continued 488 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The e Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL N to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU TRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face ba
152. PS asse aka dtr red norat 368 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Mu ldllilidii4Ml i An 1 8 O 000 4 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank 4 Assist Handle 10 Power Mirror Switch If Equipped 5 Glove Compartment 11 Horn 6 Power Window Switches UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040307643 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 4 Low Fuel
153. R EGO ESTY 558 B ME EE EE EE HEN IE 548 W Fluid Capacities 000 558 H Totally Integrated Power Module 548 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 559 W Vehicle Storage 000 554 EES ING 246624244 hauee IREE STATE 559 M Replacement Bulbs 554 sie AA N EE EE tence eas 560 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L YQ OY NE is LL ED EG A a j BEES 1 j 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Battery 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Engine Oil Fill 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usuall
154. RES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 FREEDOM TOP THREE PIECE MODULAR EN HARD TOP IF EQUIPPED CAUTION e The hard top is not designed to carry any addi tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build ing hunting or camping supplies and or luggage NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is etc Also it was not designed as a structural not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmen tal rain snow etc Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and NOTE Avisual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual bodyside or fully removed top wrap Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the screws if they are overtightened 5 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside 6 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up The Soft Top in this section 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel must be removed before removing Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior right panel water damage stains or mildew e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal Removing the t
155. RTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD
156. S I O Customer Key Programming 17 Er General Information 32s amare des 19 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 19 o Rearming The System ignea 92 999a dx 19 HI To Arm Ihe System uus exor qoe SR doen 19 O To Disarm The Systemi 245 ene ees A has 20 B illuminated Entry If Equipped 21 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 22 D To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate 22 O Remote Key Unlock On First Press 22 o To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 23 O Sound Horn On Lock sis secet E Res 24 o Using The Panic Alarm is osse RR ws 24 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee O To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 20 O Programming Additional Transmitters 25 O General Information sacs 9 ese EER ede 26 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 20 E How To Use Remote Start x aee bens s 28 joo TIPP 31 D Upper Half Door Window Removal If EQUIDDEC os iode us pa PRU horas al D Upper Half Door Window Installation If PQUIDPCC era eeaeee HE E o HEERS HE 32 D Front Door Removal Ls 32 D Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 34 IM TI eke nucis IE mi spur EE 93 6 36 E Manual Door Locks isi ke DE iR KERR 36 O Power Door Locks If Equipped 38 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear luy ET hee Gey oo ae OE eee N 40 W Windows C 41 O Power Windows If Equip
157. TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 24 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The trip odometer shows indi vidual trip mileage Refer to Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button for additional information U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at
158. Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305232 Media Center 130 RES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press
159. Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined
160. Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 8 gal 10 6L this light will turn on and a single chime will sound 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been FRONT Q activated 7 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 8 Turn Signal Indicators The left or right arrow will flash with the corre sponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn signal lever is operated A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light wi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started if the bulb does not come on have the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and s
161. Waxing Ee Ee Ee se 541 Power Door Locks 3x can 02 BRE S XE ERROR DA 38 nuc rrr 170 DINTOLS see st ER xi EO RNC E IS TER S 100 lee P es 416 417 WIndOWS 424 446 e OE EE ERG 41 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 59 Preparation TOP aekine ois caae4 RES Se AE RR 495 Pretensioners Seat DEIS sis ERA AR EE CoH ha Ed ws 58 Programmable Electronic Features 301 Radial Doy ES ss or et EDE RAAD DER RURSUS 448 Kidio Opetaio weet vate REED EED TESS DES 358 Rear Axle Differential sss 540 edP ine GE esse EED eee tances Rear Window Defroster SS SE SS se 265 Rear Window Features ss ss ss SS SS 264 Rear Wiper Washer 24 44 one 913 erapr ioti 264 Rearview Mirrors obees RE ENE MR mx BEE ER 98 Recorder Event Data sons s BERE 6564528844 72 Recreational TOWINS aub d EERDER DADE 486 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 488 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 490 602 INDEX M Reformulated Gasoline 435244 249 RSA ER De 462 Rotse xa escescte teas ene ae RR ITE ES d 024 Release Hood 24 ce4s cui dan Eb EE aes a PSU 151 Reminder Lights On uade e ME ORC eed ane os 155 Reminder Seat Belt ik 44209 o uA 58 Remote Control Doordkod aireari oe pee ees die SE 22 Remote Keyless Entry RKE s as so RR t 22 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 356 Remote 5tarBne Systemi sis SEER HEBR RR Sore i 27 R placement Bulbs esi citise Es one ORR HE GO 554 Re
162. aint with ALR first pull enough 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 va Be a sole ada To attach a Child Restraint tether strap 022633862 dr Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head restraint and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether e If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unres
163. and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service i
164. anted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle This kind of hitch is the most popular on the market today and is commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars It is typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Weight Distributing Hitch Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your h
165. ar off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031507504 Mist Control TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 steering column up or down as desired Pull upwards on WARNING the lever to lock the column firmly in place L Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Tilt Steering Column Lever 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the righ
166. ar window glass Lift the rear window glass 035734179 Wire Harness Connector 81947a57 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 7 Release the red locking tab by pulling outward 8 To remove the wiring harness press the tab and pull downward to disconnect y 035734180 035734181 Red Locking Tab Press Tab To Disconnect 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 9 To remove the washer hose pinch the grips on hose CAUTION connector and pull downward The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults located on each corner Failure to follow this caution could damage the Freedom Top Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top Datum 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary 035734182 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order Pinch Grip On Hose 10 Close the swing gate Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top 11 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 The e The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body CAUTION should be torqued to 66 in Ib 22 in lb 7 5 N
167. ares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully A MISE EN GARDE M ME AVEC DES GALS CONCLABLES PERFECTIONNES LD GRANTS POOT ETRE PUL OU GUSVEAORT ELE B Ra RA E Y oe MO COM ANE UE AASNOUETIS 4 WERE EXT A PLACS UE PLUR OMe POUS Lf UrFuNTL ME MM BY PASTE REGS POUR FUR MT COREE VERD Vas d 1 we MT C41 vet E TEW RS T9 MED EE FEW PIDER ig EET ET ES ODIO A WARNING EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIRBAGS CHLDESW Cha E ULL ED O GADONI MURID FI TUE vmar TUE MIXEIAT TE EAJIXT ALT TOR De MYDVI RASTA ORE SU GETIC FINT AUNATS USE SABEL ANU HAY WE RARE C KK UN eal BF amp ETEIUE POUR DRST tan Ti COMBLATIO LE CLADE DE Vi he ME ILTF NAD ORT PLA DE KENEESUNEMENTS HR LES BALE GONFLABLE
168. ario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service cont
169. articles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be deployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING e Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer immediately Also have the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC system serviced as well Continued serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat
170. artment console N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Console Storage Compartment Rear Storage Compartment To lock or unlock the storage compartment insert the The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by ignition key and turn To open the storage compartment a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage press the latch and lift the cover compartment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 3 1 Hip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray 035240181 Center Console 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Open the rear compartment cover Rear Storage Cover DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top 1 Locate and remove
171. ary Power Outlet 166 Electrical Power Outlets 42 0496 6 dee o8 n 166 Electronic Brake Control System 422 Brake Assist System ii sd e naar R n 423 Electronic Roll Mitigation saec ure hme 427 Traction Control System ues KAREE tea 422 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 427 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 163 Electronic Stability Control ESC ies uen mcs 428 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 286 Electronic Vehicle Information Center le die OOIE EE ET RE FEE 286 292 Emergency Drake sis 6555 ov RE bee EE 417 Emergency In Case of JACKING 45 ER EE ET bas See ee 493 594 INDEX NEE id ei Stat 42 be ok 4x2 1 099 ERGE PERS 500 Tow HOOS sesse tekki kiaii onesies 505 Emission Control System Maintenance 515 Engine Pit leaner 9a quies a osea ER ORR MR Ge 521 ler sini ME 379 Break In Recommendations 87 COMPAEN soos bod e euet eee dan ee 513 Compartment Identification 513 Exhaust Gas Caution 88 466 EE o 2s 939 sop oie do 9E RR d 377 Hooded Starting soas Re BREAK ER bho s 9577 Fuel Reguiremients 2 2x voor a es 462 558 JOM ba NE dors Soene REELE AR eR RE RO 500 OW rr 518 558 OIL Change Interval 2322 spri sranda ee 295 Oil Disposal sie es cei Ge RACER Ed ESO 520 Oid Siler 5654956425 EE ER onus ERE oe PS 520 il eleEliOi sesse 109 keeha g Trier aes 558 AOUN opereer rE 492 ORINE AE AAR EE oe eiere 376 Tempera
172. as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving NNS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 471 Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your v
173. ask you to verify that you Delete wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that y
174. assenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The
175. atch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires 408 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased
176. ation e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel T itch to the F FM or Radio FM I eee eae ee dy ordinum id List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l M Radio t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station enu Radio to switch to the radio menu BT s 44 p h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Menu Radio t itch to the radi j ERA Ato oath to en e To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Memo Previous to play the pre
177. ay when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD A Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD pla
178. b comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamp 1 Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER SCREWS AT ANY TIME m m m S 193fcb 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counterclock is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your wise then remove it from the housing local authorized dealer 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace 1 Remove the spare tire Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 2 Remove the four screws holding the lens cover in The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends place on the spare tire carrier upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate Two Door Models 18 6 px Fuel Approximate Four Door Models 22 5 Gallons Engine Oil with Filter 3 6 Liter Engine Cooling System MEE EE AE Ed 3 6 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 10 5 Quarts 9 9 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Pa
179. b to the lock position CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bulb 1 4 tum clockwise Front Park Turn Signal 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Side Marker 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front side marker socket 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 Front Fog Lamp 1 Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front fog lamp 2 Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front fog lamp connector receptacle 3 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing and then connect the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bul
180. be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ie WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED NOTE During cold weather you may experience in WARNING creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 2 4 6 R 81cd6226 Shift Pattern Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended
181. be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 429 e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than WARNING appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo eon Stab uty conte ESC cannot pearen the cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as natural e of physics M wi m the ER the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active a dd 2 aa ec oa ae DE y a an To The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also a cal po flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation cluding tho se resulting from excessive speed in Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac rd es uin d slippery ee id de celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little praning ene eee throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and Hom 0 io ve dele For Es oc do ie drivi i y driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive riving to the prevailing road conditions and skillful driver can prevent ac
182. before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the
183. bold face and are underlined 030605540 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Voice Commands Primar language send o 00000 o 0 list names list phones towing assistance a mute off new entr transfer call n Uconnect Tutorial try again aaa veo nt ee pager mobile N set up phone settings or phone phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again o redial 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and no
184. can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle i
185. care of right away and have similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake your vehicle ready when you need it rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle and cleaned as soon as possible Check tires body structure steering suspension and WARNING exhaust system for damage Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as f j P excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might required not have full braking power when you need it to e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on prevent a collision If you have been operating your the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked pension Retighten them if required and torque to the and cleaned as necessary values specified in the Service Manual e f you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 416 STARTING AND OPERATING ee POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response
186. ce on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 590 INDEX M ABS Anti Lock Brake System 275 420 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 530 POCIN Fuel ra tate Gas do ee ee eee HS 466 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 521 Air Conditioner Maintenance 523 Aw COLORING sos scs Seed e seh KOR OES KOR 259 Air Conditioning Controls siseresuerepisepes 359 Air Conditioning Fiter sesse se die PRES ER 369 Air Conditioning Refrigerant store Vee ind wes 024 Air Conditioning YSEeID 5 2 6 4 55 Gee s HR RE 359 363 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 370 AUE 46 4 r rR 524 Air Pressure Tires llle 446 eke op evel DEEL EET LE EE EE 60 Adbas Deployment xu sd ie dona soem BO ER 69 ANDA LIS 21 393 42942 925 99929 3 67 71 89 276 Airbag Mamtenante 3 054407 E ERR ES ES Eua 7l Nie ee ER OE EO EE EO 68 Alarm Security Alarm amd ac RED EED si 19 Alp SE EA ER EO OE EO EIE ON 277 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio 321 346 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 420 Anti Lock Warning Light s s a uc 3 ete 275 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 558 Appearance CONS EE he Boe oe oe ee oe ni 540 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 19 Assistance TOWING quaa ti ELE diga drag dace vs 116 Auto Down Power Windows 42 Automatic Door Locks 666 mem daa DERE im 39
187. cidents The capa bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 430 STARTING AND OPERATING The ESC system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one operating mode in 4L range Two wheel drive vehicles and four wheel drive vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes 4H Range AWD Models Or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H and 2WD vehicles Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch ESC OFF Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable In than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing t
188. crease the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel WARNING If the clutch pedal manual transmission only re mains pressed during the application of the throttle the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll down the incline This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object To avoid this do not apply throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are ready to release the clutch Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria
189. d before you return to on road driving Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and securely fastened either up or down off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at or folded down all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents If you remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury e Do not drive your vehicle on road with the wind shield down Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side um Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly r
190. d SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ a in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio d next tracks i ous and next tracks device or external USB device e RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts e Pre
191. d area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon iE oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious TE Ar injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Hazard switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed t could cause serious injury or death e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Dattery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle theft alarm not active N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar e Remote Start Aborted System Fault The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position Press and release the REMOTE START button Q will chirp twice if programmed Then the NOTE To Enter Remote Start on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn engine will start and the vehicle will
192. d muta care eed a Fore d 292 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC BE OE P TIT E Oil Chace Requited e 1a aos uc Rn Ee RR e EE IE Mam MENU eig ken ed aes cower ee 296 XO Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode I EUPA siese OES oaks ee agen DE 297 O Average Fuel Economy 299 H Distance To Empty DTE sae ske pIa Ed 300 AE ed Tie as sans HER RR RAD ER 300 o EVIC Units Selection Units In Display 301 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EIOU Sem Stalis uas AA OS ON OAR EE Had s 301 O Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If D Personal Settings Customer Programmable EOU roro os Roe MR BEE 320 Features MAAR AA ER ee eh 301 W Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo re CD DVD HDD NAV I 324 Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer q PP EER TEER ET KEER ee TAAR Ee MP3 WMA AUX Jack less 305 D Operating Instructions Voice Command D Operating Instructions Radio Mode 305 System If Equipped esses 324 i i TM 2 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD E Ope ia se Uconnect Phone And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 313 se EE ae teeta 2 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 315 ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES 925 5 List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 325 Play aa 318 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD o I
193. d pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned OFF The system will auto matically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 458 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3
194. d the parking lights will flash twice Remote Key Unlock On First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s side or all doors and swing gate on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter e For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform ing the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter NOTE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repea
195. ditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When
196. dure This procedure consists of programming a blank Key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EME 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off
197. e and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod9 USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio e A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external jump backward or forward respectively for five USB device and display data seconds e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or e Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous track previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e While a track is playing press the INFO
198. e and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 021432709 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confine
199. e and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will following conditions turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 462 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses TT MRXC4N3MF9 2546A C4N3MF9 United States CANGCA MARA See ae N BR FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor qualit
200. e reapply if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance LH Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 miles 234 000 km filter Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary _ Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 152 000 miles 247 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary LI Inspect all door latches for presence of Inspect the CV joints grease reapply if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odomete
201. e some audio devices can and or to the connectors start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect 1 J WARNING phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected device while driving Failure to follow this warning and played could result in an accident Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Setup then Select Audio Devices The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BISA device Only the current song that is playing will display info Remote Sound System Controls
202. e SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 042040029 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button P
203. e Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages Flowchart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Phonsbogik Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed PNR Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added ee Entry is modified Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Voice Tree Setup T rrmalian Select Audio SMS Incoming Voica Trainin Reset Device Towing Message es Pairing Emergency Select Phone Language Announcement Contmarian Be a haw plume Seed n Ee welll English Espiat tempai vir Francais Prop ivili Say 3 niu pin euge eroe cabo pi priarilies wal Wists Manes Crne Hare olies and fellow prompts to complete pairing Bmpr phone Ao die dale Fahey Cet heed Salem Lisia Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in
204. e Terminology And Definitions 440 O Tread Wear Indicators 451 NO Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 441 EMC OP die m 452 O Replacement Wes o ou o sos d Rem e dS es 452 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ee ite Chains 2x65 ou bods hes ERGER eave Ed 454 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 455 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 456 Base Systemi 2 9 972083 HR ER San oye os 459 O General Information ss 461 Mi Fuel Requirements llus 462 O Reformulated Gasoline 462 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 463 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 463 OMMT In Gasoline Less 464 O Materials Added To Fuel 464 ET tel Syste C ALONE ooie ER EE HEDE 465 H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 466 W Adding Fuel suo 3555 OPEREER RS 466 Fuel Piller Cap Gis Gap as 0ceteeen0 ri 466 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 468 Mi Vehicle Loading 468 OCerucanon Lapel xou 9d Rare E PEERS 468 W Trailer Towing esie 9 DERE REEL AE RARR 471 O0 Common Towing Definitions 471 E Trailer Hitch Classification a ua sarees 474 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings ua ids cau tebe wees EX 475 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 479 E lowing Requirements 5 iu aes EN EE 480 EDIOWIBS TIS dacdez d VERA de dn d aed aot 485 NS TA TING AND OPERATING 375 ll Recreat
205. e Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Tow ing Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method i
206. e indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of IC an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the
207. e is applied to the slipping wheel s to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it in
208. e minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds ru The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increa
209. e phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the vr button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations Prompts On Setup Confirmations Prompts Off Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength
210. e places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock 412 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should t
211. e seriously or fatally injured Chil ae dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle brake brake pedal or the shift lever is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate glove compartment and console storage Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Power Door Locks If Equipped WARNING The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch forward to lock the doors and For personal security reasons and safety in an rearward to unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Automatic Door Locks If Equipped When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when
212. e the vehicle parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged Continued before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead
213. e will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert seat belt is buckled For further information refer to Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert a TY Removing Slack From Belt WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In
214. eaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions e Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim e Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result e Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry fy on the paint leaving a streak e After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Ea e Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam Windows age the top material Also increased water pres WASHING Use MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent or sure may force past the weather st
215. eans 54 UPRO Cae 245444405 SEER HT EA RE 543 Vanity MITOS sake bd e b oe 938 3 Se 100 Variance COMPASS 2092599 Push DE RR N BE 288 298 N INDEX 607 Vehicle Certification Label isi ese KERSE He De 468 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Wellicle Ode searg rie EaR e one oH 442 468 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Wellicle Slo dE sce oco niae oria Ea 9 89 Rut 368 554 Viscosity Eng me OU ui erar oe Genet ees os ahve 520 Voice Recognition System VR 132 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster DSEHPUO ouere DES HER ie idi 272 Warnings and Cautions ves vos qox RS Hoy eta teg 8 Warranty Information 05 584 Washers Windshield ees 525 Waxing and Polishing x 2 390 83 RD R RR ER 541 Wheel and Wheel Trim ess 543 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 543 VUDOCBUIIGDUBS segrare dua arrarir SA E 43 Window FOSS i doa rero Eon a inb e 369 WINGOWS 4 4 ORE IE BORN TE OES ee ee S YE 41 Ee Lus vua doe hee eee eee eens 41 Windshield Defroster 90 361 366 Windshield Washers 159 525 Dd Bae AR SEN OE ERENS 525 Windshield Wiper Blades 524 Windshield Wipers sesiet S UR EER one TIER 159 Minds eld di AAR tuts dc Red ERAS 257 Wiper rm 264 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio
216. eature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To partially open the window press halfway to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Window Lockout Switch Four Door Models The window lockout switch located between the front window switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console To disable the window controls press the win dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls press the window lockout button upward 021933671 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Rear Power Windows Four Door Models Wind Buffeting The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console Press the switch down ward to open the window and upward to close the window Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the BP windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the window opening ey P oil UM Rear Po
217. ed work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam age the windows FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center con tains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Totally Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Mini Description ae 30 ws E ser Cor Module Case Module Pink N esT Jj EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse JA 25 Amp Driver Door Node J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Natural Pink Relay Manifold Tun Rear Blower Motor Radiator Fan Ignition Off Draw Jo 25 Amp Passenger Door Node ing Valve Natural 30 Amp oway Bar Pink J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Green tem ABS Pump 30 Amp Stability Control Sys Pink tem J13 60 Amp JZ 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Yellow IOD Main Pink tem ABS Valve JA4 40 Amp Rear Defroster Stability Control Sys Green tem J15 40 Amp Front Blower DERIT NP e J2 40 Amp PZEV Sec Motor Flex J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green Fuel Green 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavit
218. ed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES attempting any procedure yourself The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who des
219. ed when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain the engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery fy bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System
220. eded see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Informa tion section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels NS TA TING AND OPERATING 453 It is recommended you contact your original equipment WARNING or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the that specified for your vehicle Some combinations safety handling and ride of your vehicle of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel
221. ee Cos oe ne eee 278 280 286 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 402 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 402 OI Change Indicator 222639 RE RAK oe 202 299 Oil Change Indicator Reset 282 295 CI Pressure DIS BE s pemes Kaba neo nee 2 bn el 273 OI EOI sisie 203 gen ae ea EE ED 518 apachy 24446545044 eo ERROR ROES RS 558 Eiselen d sib dass HOE ag E Es os 295 nra C 518 Inn PA ERA RE OT DT OE ES 520 Identibealion LOO ees seat oper tanis 519 Materials Added to eua wa REEDE HE s 520 Pressure Warning Light 273 Recommendation sn 519 558 MISCOBID Xu uana ese antag EC RUD ees 520 558 Onboard Diagnostic System 514 515 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 98 OVEIOHUB ees AAR EE r ee et ee 394 Overdrive OFF SWIC as ane EREEDR ERROR RA RS 394 N INDEX 601 OVSrDegugb EDINE x23 9 99272 9 E 277 492 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 585 Pant Cale ss OE arsta Oe wee ae ae ee 540 IE Pi KEPER EIE EE AS 540 Panic Alarm osse ARE SA EO DE ARE RE 24 Parks Bike sis agus md e ES ae N A PS gw A17 Passing LICH oo onse d c dd AE bb eder ERR 156 Personal ein ene teeew eo FREE PREKE ses 301 POG 646054 bau ee R EED OO OU OOR AE 86 Phone Cellular 2239929 92 9 m AE c3 eo 101 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 101 Placard Tire and Loading Information 442 Polishing and
222. egardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package will include a four pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustration 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O OPO ad Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 485 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control to select a lower gear range NOTE Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a t
223. ehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this Owner s Manual concern ing vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition 472 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supp
224. einstalling side bars mark 3 the original locations prior to removing e 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering lt 819292b7 3 Remove the sun visor 4 Remove the A pillar cap 5 Disconnect microphone if equipped with Uconnect phone 6 Open the sport bar Velcro covering 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION 7 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar and one hex bolt Do not remove the head impact foam from the side 13 mm on top of the side bar bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping NOTE PU side bar out oe d dodi 8 Remove the side bar assembly and reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 9 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 WARNINCG You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the side bars from the vehicle or securely store
225. el Filler Cap Gas Cap ventilation system to force fresh outside air into The gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement 1 e l Connu F the correct one for this vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Fuel Filler Cap WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Continued 468 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that t
226. el confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely 410 STARTING AND OPERATING ee recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident shift the trans mission into a lower gear with 4L Low engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn qu
227. en and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom posi tion will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is Sports Bar Reading Light also known as the Party mode because it allows the The rear cargo light may be turned on by pressing the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light off discharging the vehicle s battery N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper opera tion 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent CAUTION past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur whe
228. en the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it NS TA TING AND OPERATING 419 difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking WARNING Continued brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not athe vehe e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children WARNING to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be e Never use the PARK position on an automatic seriously or fatally injured Children should be transmission as a substitute for the parking brake warned not to touch the parking brake brake Always apply the parking brake fully when pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle A child could operate power windows other controls or mov
229. ening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at wwew sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line
230. entire seat assembly toward the instrument panel tome Tip n Slide Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 min utes NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five m
231. ep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VR button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VR button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect TM Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Sve button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the EVR button and say the Voice T
232. equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence complet
233. er ating for proper tire inflation procedures Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically WARNING actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over ad collision 1 000 lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of ma 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 484 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer r
234. er Easy Entry Seat Two Door Models Pull upward on the recline lever toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the entire seat forward Easy Entry Seat To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seatback upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the track locks 030934794 Easy Entry Lever 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e The front passenger seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position e The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear Seats Driver s Seat Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback to its full forward position Recline Lever Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat forward Easy Entry Tip n Slide 030934794 Passenger Seat In addition to Easy Entry the front passenger seat is also Easy Entry Lever equipped with Tip n Slide This feature allows for easier entry for rear passengers 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M With the seat forward pull the
235. erations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued Exhaust Gas e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area WARNING inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon ously injured or killed monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Breathing it can make you unconscious and can vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO belts follow these safety tips e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate
236. ermine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor iz
237. es the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there i
238. es the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Continued 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ie Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and
239. etails e Oil Change Required with a single chime e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped nmm Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and release the MENU button once for each step A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed The follow
240. f PUPPET ou d erdes 9a Roe RE eo VR O Front Seatback Recline O Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat Two Door Models i93 wr que Eu Sd a ares i o Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models o Heated Seats If Equipped O Head Restraints o Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models o Removing The Rear Seat Two Door Models 157 O Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models e PERT 149 0 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door iuo e tee RADE eae DE 149 N To Open And Close The Hood 151 Mi e ee ae ee 152 E Multifuncion Lever o vies meg whee ex 152 o Headlights And Parking Lights 153 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 154 TUE oi LIE scenes 9 9c 2 929909 oa ER 154 O Lane Change Assist 4 acp acecz exon de melden aa 155 E Dighis On Reminder eccexkstERRARRSeRS 1595 o High Low Beam Switch 155 O Flash To Pass N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 El vor rog LONG os 293 9 94 5 REK paws ES 156 H lo Ded Hval ss EA PI PISA REXE RES 165 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 5 vsu e xa 156 UH lo Resume Deed lt q 2h nays eae SOR ECT aes 165 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 157 o To Vary The Speed Setting 165 OMMEN ents soc cuasrtns WA WE S EDE EE 157 H To Accelerate For Passing W Windshield Wipers And Washers 159 W Electrical Power Outlet mi ke SES RE ER DE o Windshield Wiper O
241. f all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 587 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road cha
242. ff 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture HOTOIL Warning message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warn ing message is illuminated and you continue operat ing the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Puses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil chang
243. firmly pressing the brake pedal parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the ignition key Once the ignition key is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal lever Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requir
244. functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proce
245. g tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel
246. gs work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags is required in a frontal or side collision Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemen tal Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial decelerat
247. h moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic win dows without scratching It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experienc
248. he ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESC mode is intended for off road use only 4L Range AWD Models ESC Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESC system will be in this mode In 4L range ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the normal ESC stability function 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ee returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system shuts off The ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but the ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESC is off NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any posi
249. he cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross
250. he driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see secti
251. he engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km I Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule C O C C O L L L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even 1f it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet
252. he ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle 390 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolo
253. he responsibility of the manufacturer system 5 An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to systems can result in civil penalties being assessed overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or against you some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 466 STARTING AND OPERATING M Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ADDING FUEL vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the Fu
254. he set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp auxiliary power outlets that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 The front power outlet is powered from the ignition automatically when ready for use To preserve the heat switch Power is available when the ignition switch is in ing element do not hold the lighter in the heating the ON or ACC position position A second power outlet is located inside the center console and is powered directly from the vehicle battery CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
255. heel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued Jack Warning Label N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from the stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Connect the jack handle driver to the extension then to the lug wrench 4 Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged Rear Jacking Location 060539333 6 498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES MM MY WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise Front Jacking Location 5 Raise
256. his will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat 1 9 belts Pull Strap Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 030933905 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 To Raise The Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt make sure your seatback is fully latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Release both the hood latches 031333906 Hood Latch Raise the hood and locate the safety latch located in the middle of the hood opening Push the latch to the left side of the vehicle to open the hood You may have
257. hut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 10 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the p
258. iator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine cool ant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with
259. ice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 3 SEATS Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Relea
260. ickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Downhill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 411 WARNING confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and proceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an inclin
261. idding and loss of control 406 STARTING AND OPERATING M Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use second gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement
262. ide windows affix the window tem side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 11 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 035905867 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 12 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM 13 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate 14 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear at the lower left corner of the rear window opening window The spongy part of the seal should be down and Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned pone outward to seal with the swing Ee Ve
263. ied Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M example you can use the compound form voice com
264. ies depending upon the disc PILAE ee eu TOSS og These selections can only be made while playing a e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options om will display the following e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by
265. ignation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ee your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Li
266. igned your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per you have any doubt about your ability to perform a form repairs and service when necessary could service job take your vehicle to a competent me result in more costly repairs damage to other chanic components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the fl
267. ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position not the LOCK OFF position Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle 510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised Internal damage to the transmission or transfer and the opposite end on a towing dolly case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Failure to follow these towing methods can cause If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward o direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the severe damage to the transmission and or transfer transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in Ee Such damage is not covered by the New PARK for automatic transmissions or in gear NOT in Vehicle Limited Warranty NEUTRAL for manual transmissions Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed instructions MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 6L
268. iles exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 11
269. ill flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary The symbol indicates the status of the Hill 2 Descent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 435 Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1 mph 1 5 km h 2 5 mph 4 km h 4 mph 6 5 km h However the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed
270. ime set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a 130 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip the sport bar covers 035605928 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a 130 bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug bows facing upward being careful not to cross thread the screws or over tighten c Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets NOTE To aid in reattaching the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATU
271. in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on CAUTION scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush vehicle or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These Wheel And Wheel Trim Care products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion equivalent is recommended e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp c
272. ing Two Door Models separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly be hind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant o
273. ing Assistance 606 INDEX NEE NN Tas kok Rear Axle X 2295 iet eae 1 793 99 iet 398 Tr choim Control x oue dei p MR DRR Ene Hel erede d 422 Trailer Sway Control 15C s cer eden dog Fo eos 433 Trailer 03008 dae eee bee bee SUPCR e HR s 471 Cooling Systemi MIS sa ssa soi Fa een es Ae 486 Hitches uu AE OE AO S NAR E 462 474 Minimum Requirements a Ed ye ews os ges 480 Trailer and Tongue Weight 479 WIN vis Soa dos ee eee eee aos oe 484 Trader Towing Guide is es se Ee MAER ER gen 475 Toler Weil dbe cease DER KORS YE 475 Transier Case 5 py Saas ek OAR 599 Four Wheel Drive Operation 394 Mantenance EERS aha ad AE eh ey ee ee 539 Transmission AOMA Sous ea ena BURE ER HEDE e 386 Maintenance uocosac 94 REY os daw 536 538 Moral 1x22 Ee RAD ESE d Ede S 380 Ranee DI IOC so Ep RA HR hdd ee 278 sinn PC Tm 383 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry due pes ace da nre de 26 Transportne Pel esuacso eoa os 2 nci abo hon d dod 86 Tread Wear Indicators sa ne Gas Adis Bee ok es 451 T p CODIDUIOE sie 45 564 8649 rd e SER 286 TED OUDE cus pee dub sca ors I gars eg PES US 280 Trip Odometer Reset Button sss x RR RR 278 TUE SONGS cos qox vum ev Oe OST 154 273 556 557 WET COUMCEICR sag cue ue aree ER P oad DER 349 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 101 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 587 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 349 Untwisting Procedure beat Belt a2aicceadt
274. ing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisessi
275. ing features are in the Main menu e Compass Outside Temperature and ECO display e Average Fuel Economy e Distance to Empty e Elapsed Time e EVIC Units Selection e System Status e Personal Settings NOTE For features in the EVIC that can be reset Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time the EVIC prompts a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word RESET next to it NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 When the SELECT button is pressed the selected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the SELECT button graphic Pressing SELECT a second time will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time After three seconds without pressing SELECT RESET ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature will have been reset Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass headings the outside temperature ECO if the EVIC display is not already displaying this screen NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display be
276. ing to the ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position third detent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Auto matic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position 031407553 Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic mode Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Operation NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 e A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off 3 Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is
277. ins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone also allows the user to download entries one at a time from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the amp button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept a single phonebook entry from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual f
278. inutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head 7770 RM MG G G wM oo restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjus
279. ion The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN positions If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light for four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Wa
280. ion A child could operate power windows NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds other controls or move the vehicle when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC Continued position Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it
281. ion toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 030407085 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror 030433897 Outside Rearview Mirror 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Power Mirror Switch After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Vanity Mirrors Vanity mirrors
282. ion ECO screen SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button when prompted by the EVIC to Reset Main Menu features with a reset capability or to change Personal Settings DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button when prompted by the EVIC to step through stored system warning messages or Personal Settings features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Low Tire Pressure e Damaged Key e Key in Ignition e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Key Fob Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle in Motion manual transmission Door Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which door is open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Doors Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion e Gate Ajar with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate back door open and A single chime e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating for more d
283. ion it into the 19 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate swing gate brackets bracket on both the left and right sides 20 Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 21 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS IF their secured position EQUIPPED CAUTION Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Opening The Sunrider 3 Slide the plastic sleeve forward 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 4 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the material is folded back as shown 81925914 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not 5 Locate the straps to secure the side bows Wrap the be activated for Sunrider use If activated the soft top straps around the bows as shown Repeat on the other must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels side 036107475 036107474 6 Rep
284. ional Towing O Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Behind Motorhome Etc 486 lee 22390 diy ba ER Ene ed 487 0 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 2 Ga ad oe ee ea ru eee ae eed 486 376 STARTING AND OPERATING M STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Four Wheel Drive Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted
285. ions and the navigation system if equipped Press the SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you continue the informa tion will display in the selected language 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Auto Unlk On Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears RKE Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door Ist Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn With Lock When on is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Flash Lamp with Lock When on is selected the front and rear turn signals wil
286. ip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Change the engine oil filter pages for the required maintenance intervals e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintena
287. ir infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you e Rearward facing child seats must never be used in will use it before you buy it the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for p ie weight and height limits infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the infant or child restraint It could come loose in a restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may collision The child could be badly injured or not work when you need it killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a
288. ire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that General Information has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to th
289. isplay informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription
290. itch Headlight 52422244 PES wa 155 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 432 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 286 ENOL Pr 91 FOS ase sta Gta ae we cas tae ee DE 156 557 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 2 mo 492 Heade Dt DuC IE aco vera dee ER PR es 153 tiese is ase pira nani Roe diced acm dea 555 Lion Beane os lt ehh capa gas 3399 S nra OE ans 273 High Bed Indicator sss oues RE RR RA sis 273 Hill Descent Control Indicator 434 Dumimnated ENY repertis intu RE OA ob gd 2 Instfument Cluster 221222222 2i 153 IDESEIO 25 3 54 91938 93 93 OS OR ees DORS 157 Lights On Reminder sites wan ba Re 155 Lowiucd 226552644554 DEE EER ee n 272 OU Presstt as oderat eee he fbi oes 273 N INDEX 599 PassiN 2 55e AO IE ET SEEK 156 ei eel 444 064 aensne a os ERNS Do Rear Vall aas sad Bay DAE RES HO IE Do Seat Belt Reminder 272 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 277 vano C bbb de Markel 445 esaet Ba hee WEES RS 557 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 278 Traction Control 2s eee nd me es 432 TUE oignal puse kone X Pv as 91 154 273 556 557 puc rm 2712 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 272 Loading Velsi le ste EER BE KRAP EUR ea 468 iu io oe one os ees Beas eee ee a eee 441 Lod ins de PT Em 398 Locks Automatic Door s io62445 64 RS bebe 933 39 Child Protection usur 3o RE EE ES RES 40 DOO 64445656 922 994 9525 9252235995 3
291. itch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi tional information 474 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 475 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GIW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 6L Manual Two Door 5 329 Ibs 25 sq ft 1 000 lbs 100 Ibs 45 kg Sport Model 2 417 kg
292. itch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism
293. itions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle If the fluid becomes contaminated with water it should be changed immediately Otherwise change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position partes Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Scepter 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drain First remove the fill plug B then the drain plug C The recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When replacing the plugs do not overtighten them You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further inf
294. itter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is activated the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the RKE transmitter LOCK button Re lease both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK butt
295. l flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Headlamps with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When on is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on If the headlights were turned on by this feature they will also turn off when the wipers are turned off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOC
296. lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to your authorized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat positions the shoulde
297. latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 E AXXXXYX AAAI x x AJ TH CC 06 v y Red Connector Latch 6 Unhook the door strap from the body hook 7 With the door open lift the door to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when removing them 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All doors are equipped with an interior rocker type door lock lever To lock a door when leaving your vehicle press the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and close the door To UNLOCK the door press the rocker lever rearward Manual Door Lock Full Frame Doors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could b
298. ld and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the sys tem will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select temperatures while rotating right into the red area the outside air position for maximum defogging indicates warmer temperatures e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode un
299. le 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km I Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center a m Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change t
300. ler 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door ON window by opening the door and lifting the half door ie window out Nee NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side mer 4 Open the swing gate NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls swing gate brackets will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 81b34aa7 5a32 81 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely bracket on both the left and right sides unzip the window p e apt Fa EE 3 aa EG D N 036033903 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window UNDERSTANDING THE
301. levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supp
302. light stays on through several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 26 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC s
303. ll times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and e Two people should never be belted into a single using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You
304. loth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cl
305. low the outside tem perature in the EVIC display if the audio system is on the ECO indicator will override the audio information display line if the Display Fuel Saver personal setting is ON see Personal Settings section This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming
306. luster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the EVIC and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this 460 STARTING AND OPERATING M occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and t
307. ly This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready
308. m Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior 2 5 N m water damage stains or mildew e Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior e t is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstall ing washer hose Push on until click is heard DOOR FRAME Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame s may damage the seals causing water WARNING to leak into the vehicle s interior Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door The door frame s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Removal WARNING 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment Use both hands to remove the door frames The door knobs two per door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used is F 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the ae a A front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle storage Store in a secure location UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident
309. m bag down so the loops and hooks are facing downward Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and fold it back NOTE Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing downward NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 035707990 035707991 Unfold the black panel divider ensure the divider is Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the laying flat Secure the Velcro located at the center of the latches facing upward divider 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag 035707993 035707992 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Install the seat attachment strap at the top of the bag Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and through the loops straps facing the back of the rear seat Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages located at the base of the rear seat 035707994 035707995 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and Front Panel s Installation Dop the strep Pina m e M on the strap hu NOTE Set the panels on the windshield frame so
310. mal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to t
311. mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the amp button to begin e After the
312. mended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave an unattended child in the vehicle All three rear seating positions of the four door model have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments The two door model can accommodate flexible LATCH compatible child seats in the two outboard seating positions only The two door model does not have a center seating position Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only in both the two door and four door models Regardless of the spe cific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard
313. ment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate e immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The p
314. mited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km
315. mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek d
316. mpt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor
317. n ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively 434 STARTING AND OPERATING swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light w
318. n Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram SSS Ec gt 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increase
319. n closed before zipping to prevent damage 036033904 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 16 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 15 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM 17 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate 19 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to bracket on both the left and right sides their secured position I 18 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top Please visit the owner s section of Jeep com for instruc fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and tional videos the top can then be snapped into place If the tempera ture is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains C o A e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax buildup may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural
320. n the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent settings The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to Front Wiper Control 18 seconds 031507503 031507503 Front Wiper Control NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 delay range the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to cle
321. nce Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the 8 000 miles 13 000 km engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary L1 Inspect all door latches for presence of Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary grease reapply if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires
322. ndicator Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome ters The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 22 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 23 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Fach tire including the spare if provided Q inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle should be checked monthly when cold and placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to
323. ndows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side mer 4 Open the swing gate 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls swing gate brackets will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 81b34aa7 5a32 81 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely bracket on both the left and right sides unzip the window ossos3903 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 81925b60 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle that they rest on top
324. ne to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the VR button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the EvR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following be
325. ned for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 8007 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone
326. nfo Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA And MP3 Audio Play o1 a Re i we a BE eee we do f 328 luc EDE EER Yen won a ONE 318 O Notes On Playing MIPS Files i s wee dew ns 330 D Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 333 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code KERE 450600645 465s RE PD el 333 0 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 334 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 42 919 SEER 999 H Notes On Playing MP3 Files 341 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 344 O Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 344 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If POUP P I ey bacan ot RAL ORE RE E es 345 ll iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 349 O Connecting The iPod Or External USB pun PM C see eee ea ESE fos 350 E Usine This Pear iss v mor on 379 e Sel O Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 291 ELS MOUSE 4 244444265 PIiWPPU TRACER 351 O List Or Browse Mode iss etd em co ae di 353 O Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 355 W Steering Wheel Audio Controls 356 O Radio Operation OCD Player B CD DVD Disc Maintenance anaana 358 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 358 W Climate Controls ss e 65 deals veges RR 358 o Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 959 O Automatic Temperature Control ATC If PQUIGDCG P 363 HAOpersting TI
327. ng Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer 48 64 96 128 to load than non multisession discs land 48 160 192 VBR e Number of files and folders Loading times will ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title increase with more files and folders are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Layer 3 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not single session disc enable the Disc at Once option supported before writing to the disc 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the
328. ng enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the front of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Power Inverter The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If
329. ng the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the en gine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to det
330. nged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section to select a l
331. nly 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M16 10 Amp Airbag Module M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper Red Natural M17 15 Amp Left Tail License M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Diesel Blue Park Lamp Yellow Lift Pump Export Onl meer Blue Lamp M26 10 Amp Power Window 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Red Switch Driver Win Natural ASD 1 and 2 dow Switch EER mma Blue Node Interior Light Red Wireless Module pe ma 3 Left Horn HI LOW Blue J1962 Diagnostic Feed Red MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps M3 10 Amp _ Anti Lock Brake Sys Yellow Red tem Electronic Stabil AEN ity Control Stop Lamp Switch Fuel Pump Rela 7 M32 10 Amp Airbag Controller TT Red EUROPE M33 10 Amp _ Powertrain Controller 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors M34 10 Amp Park Assist Climate Name Red _ Control System Headlamp Wash CAUTION Compass e When installing the Integrated Power Module a ae s cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Red erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so a may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Yellow Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure Continued 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown
332. not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Boo
333. nt courtesy overhead console and door cour Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the doors or open any door Dome ON position extreme top position This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur extreme bottom position ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and activate the Panic Alarm from a maxi mum distance of 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 021340825 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate Press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver s door only or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed the Illuminated Entry will initiate an
334. nterval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear 418 STARTING AND OPERATING xe The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e Wh
335. o 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 448 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalen
336. o any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Sct temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed Aulomatic User selectable to any speed Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point User selectable fo any air delivery point Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time Aulomatic User selectable outside or recirculated Not allowed in Defrost Mode User selectable outside or recirculated Not allowed in Defrost Mode Automatic Automatic Automatic User selectable A C on or off User selectable A C on or off 045663216 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between
337. o con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone button and Voice Com mand Sve button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE The driver side upper windshield trim contains the microphone for the Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certif
338. o the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING WARNING Continued e No objects should be placed over or near the air I your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Continued Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the SAB the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with SAB do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating SAB could drive the objects into occupants causing serious injury Do not cover or place items on
339. olant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to MOI UR lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle Jack Storage should be jacked on a firm level surface only Spare Tire Stowage Avoid ice or slippery areas To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug Jack Location wrench turning them counterclockwise The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 lbs 23 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking 1 Park on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slip
340. ollow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9
341. on with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve hicle Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of a battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military bas
342. on for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 MPEG Sampling Fre Pikade iin Playback of MP3 WMA Files Specification quency kHz p When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded 320 256 224 the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium MPEG 1 Audio BALD 192 160 128 contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more 112 96 80 64 time to start playing the MP3 WMA files a Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be f i 160 128 144 fected bw the followme MPEG Audio 2 220516 112 96 80 64 0y 0e 0 owne rmm ayer 56 48 e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Sampli
343. on on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your WARNING Continued vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument between you and the door 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a colli
344. ong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in
345. oning the system will automatically make the Automatic Temperature Control 3 djustment Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger M l uu I i ML pi unu aiit 045640031 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic o
346. op opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior The hard top assembly must be positioned prop 1 Fold down the sun visor and move it to the side 2 Turn the rear fasteners knobs located on the over head speaker bar assembly counterclockwise until they can be removed erly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicles interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior 0357073 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 3 Turn the center L shaped locks two from the center 4 Turn the rear L shaped lock located above the shoul of the roof panel der belt anchorage 035707351 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the windshield 035707353 6 Remove the left hand panel To remove the right panel follow the steps above except for Step 3 Freedom Top Storage Bag Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard Top come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to store your Freedom Top panels The storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat Lay the Freedo
347. or decrease the bass tones 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 16 Digit Character Display Co
348. or lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS bree SARTRE OE EE N EE es 98 O Inside Day Night Mirror osse ses ee 98 vi ii el tige MARS AE KT FOR EE 98 O Power Mirrors If Equipped 100 o Heated Mirrors If Equipped 100 Ayam MITO sod ade kee ee ete ees 100 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 101 MOPEO sos uos ue C9 eee abs e o dem 103 O Phone Call Features 111 D Uconnect Phone Features H Advanced Phone Connectivity H Things You Should Know About Your Uconnec M THONG ec e SCR tn wae eda derat O General Information a ss ie eue o deen Rs ll Voice Command If Equipped H Voice Command System Operation aprono METTI O Voice Training Jae eee een hee ET EG 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie ll Seats O Pront Seat Adusien sos ch ones sea 9 3 o Manual Seat Height Adjustment I
349. or specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opp
350. orma tion Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e
351. orsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film
352. orted In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre i gem es B Rate Gems 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 125 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 Layer 3 MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 2205 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option
353. orted by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Trailer Tongue Weight TW The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1076 or more than 1576 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control If Equipped The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 tongue It typically provides adjustable friction associ ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un w
354. ortunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion d Peso the Se ution econ e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say language is deleted Phonebook Delete e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will deleted or edited then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List e Press the button to begin Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say e The Uconnect Phone will
355. ose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position NOTE When in 4WD the ESC Off Indicator Light will display in the instrument cluster Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after complet ing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neutral Once the shift is completed place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmis sion NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid at
356. osition To prevent this do not attempt to roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling Instead use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer 426 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e If you use a trailer brake controller with your e Failure to follow these warnings may cause the trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle HSA Off Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK If you wish to tum off the HSA system follow this Continued procedure 1 Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK auto matic transmission or NEUTRAL with clutch out with another vehicle object or person and cause serious o
357. osition the sun visors 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEE Closing The Sunrider SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS IF 1 Remove the straps from the side bows EQUIPPED 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side CAUTION 3 Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the Operating the top opening a door or lowering a vehicle window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior 4 Hook the header latches to the loops on the wind shield frame close latches and return the sun visors to their original positions NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom 5 Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle link NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Opening The Sunrider 3 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 5 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown the header on top of the rear portion of the deck Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 036007405 6 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each s
358. ot be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a
359. ou have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp e button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the vr button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this
360. ou the number The key code can also be obtained by your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY position Ignition Switch Positions 3 ON RUN 4 START IOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 Push the ignition key inward 4 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING WARNING Continued e Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking e Do not leave children or animals inside parked brake shift the transmission into PARK and re vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may move the key fob from the ignition When leaving cause serious injury or death the vehicle always lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN posit
361. ower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup 392 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to de
362. own The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes Th
363. ped 41 E Mind BUTEN ues de 4s DRS one T RATE 43 Mi Rear Swing Gate 2000 44 W Occupant Restraints 0004 45 Hap Shoulder Belts sis dseek 6456240554 48 D Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout Four Door Models Only 53 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 54 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 54 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 55 H Event Data Recorder EDR 222 2v 72 D Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR O Child Restraints a 253 65 eda seem ER ER 73 If Equipped 6 ee EE eee eee 26 Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 87 I PUEDES Sana mel EA aa eaee stis W Safety Tips ouo ee x EGR SES SE RS HR 87 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 58 O Transporting Passengers isses 87 x erry Ge ind m i EIE Et Cds bea nee ee oe ERES 88 C Seat Belts And Pregnant Women JE RM D Seat Belt Extender 0 60 D Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Outside The Vehicle sodat AE N AE 2T no P Un 60 H Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 65 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give y
364. per gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking tap the shift lever to the left repeatedly as the vehicle slows The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down 394 STARTING AND OPERATING Overdrive Operation e 4L Four wheel drive low range The automatic transmission includes an electronically si PE controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC Operating Instructions Precautions Four Wheel Drive Shift Contiols The transfer case provides four mode positions The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H e 2H Two wheel drive high range position for normal street and highway conditions such l l as hard surfaced roads e 4H Four wheel drive high range In the event that additional traction is required the e N Neutral transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accom plished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces
365. peration 159 W Power Inverter If Equipped 170 HIntermittent Wiper System ass ewe mat ER 160 ME Cupholders si aas d ric RD RE RE de iie 172 o Windshield Washers 52 uc eines exw ans 161 ELPromt Cupholders ss sis ese RR ERROR 172 Mist TEAT M ER E 162 ARear Cupholder DRAERS TEE IE REN 172 B Tilt Steering Column 162 Loco SERE EE EE a dees EG 172 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 163 O Glovebox Storage ss maa MERKERS HER 172 Med oi DR Y 164 O Console Storage Compartment 179 E jo SetA Desired Speed aa res RED RR MED 165 O Rear Storage Compartment 179 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie W Dual Top If Equipped usw ker ess 174 O Door Frame Installation Two Door 7 Removing The Soft Top E 174 Models i254 beads bee HE BE d d eid d 194 O Installing The Soft lop 2 0 ub ee 177 ER ad i ed mE 195 m is T OP en ee ee Moeder rate op 179 N Soft Top Two Door Models 198 lee ca ea i m D Front Panel s Removal 180 HOUSE Reyne OCH Ie OP voer EM 7 Freedom Top Storage Bag issus 182 D Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top 202 D Front Panel s Installation 186 TOUCHING EE ON ODE Seger at nara ie ewe Front Panci installation Willy eared O Raising The Soff lop iss oce ep 445 0 EE 214 NOP Removed S an kn acca ees BOS RR Ye E 187 W Soft Top Four Door Models 223 E Reat Hard Top Remo
366. peration or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individually selected In off it li nde id HG Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Air Recirculation Control Air Temperature Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic Automatic Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set mode knob t
367. perature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Manual Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating cond
368. pery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495 4 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE 5 Turn the ignition to LOCK 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 060506162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle 6 when the vehicle is being jacked 496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jacking Instructions WARNING Continued WARNING Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack help prevent personal injury or damage to your Only use the jack in the positions indicated and vehicle for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Always park on a firm level surface as far from D If working on or near a roadway be extremely the edge of the roadway as possible before raising aredi ol materia the vehicle To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the w
369. placement Keys 2421426444 9X RR ERE A SF Ed 17 ISGDESCOPReD ED Ele sucio ace xn Oe mi RR e n 516 Replacement ites uus dw RE ER ACRI ORO 452 Reporting Satety Defects si xam spe BR ie RE 584 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 295 Restraint Head cs 6 0854454 566 EED SERE 145 Restraints Child eee 73 77 Isesttainis OGGHDODU 4444444444 eid Eeee 45 Kotation ICS 22 us 2 23 59 bees 3932 29 29 2 53 3 455 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle amp 2e deed xn 89 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 2 Safety Defects Reporting is sad aub tug ends 584 Safety Information Tire ase xen HORE RD 3 436 bale Als epics ure 2 Gos HER LEED ee ess ARE 87 galet Exhaust GaS 24444564 SERE bee OE BEE 88 Satellite Radio Antenna 321 346 Schedule Maintenance leen 562 Deal Belt Reminder uisus P 3s ERA DE RE RD ce 58 Sed Bells 1424554465455 42450 64 EERS REELE 48 89 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 54 And Pregnant Women soes sx 4444 easy 99 Child Restraint ss 73 74 83 EXIDE 3222592 93 as DA AREA PRG VUE Eres 60 FROME eal 23263 38590 8 Aer Khe bee Sous 48 INSPCCHOM 6 4 a aeuetee RARE RD RES E 89 Mariene 3 9 6 2 3 b ED bad HY ORR RE 545 Nn INDEX 603 Pretensioners uu 9x0 2 29 6 G4 a CSE 2244 58 Reminder 2226994 239342934 BE ROER 272 Untwisting Procedure sine nee esae d a d 54 v RAAR OER RE E OPE 137 Aid je NEE a oes 2 dede Cod RE SR HAN
370. position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt for typical instal lation instructions Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars X located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages oa Door Madey Models 022633805 Latch Anchorages Two Door Models 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat dn ee 022633862 Am Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models EA Many but not all restraint systems will be eguipped with Tether Strap Mount
371. press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked ra To unlock the axles press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch AxelekSwich Lock Switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column 053010747 Sway Bar Switch Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Press the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 401 when activation conditions
372. priate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer for further information COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 located on the lower left part of the cluster below the speedometer RESET 040541179 Mini Trip Control Buttons 4 Press and release the STEP button on the steering wheel Compass Display to access the options in the Compass display Control Buttons The Compass Temperature control buttons are located on the left spoke of the steering wheel NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving The following displays can be reset or changed e Compass Temperature AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy ET will reset display DT
373. prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e Th
374. r children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown the
375. r Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577 WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per hues Gas eee eee ee DIG AAR E 581 O Prepare For The Appointment 581 df te dies Hi 46444 fevered apne ade DI 581 o Be Reasonable With Requests 581 N If You Need Assistance 581 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 582 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 582 Hn Medco Contactes 2a x Ee AD RAS uedi 582 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 583 A Seve CONOCI 4 eeudna ie newer sees oes 3 583 W Warranty Information 584 M MOPAR Parts eene xd eme ERE 584 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 584 O In The 50 United States And Washington
376. r belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the position that serves you best 1 EN Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Drive Center Passenger FirstRow N A N A ALR ALR ALR Second Row ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the p
377. r child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE description under Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Posi Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR tions section The chart below defines the seating posi ith an A ic Locking R ALR Ho a ee eee a yore of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it cinching latch plate through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch Driver Center Passenger plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next e CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and FirstRow N A N A AR then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt Second Row ALR ALR ALR retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode e N A Not E 1 To install a child restr
378. r fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle NOTE The HSA system may also be turned on and off if the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NS 1A TING AND OPERATING 427 manual transmission with wheels straight Apply park ing brake on manual transmission vehicle 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running the brake applied and the clutch out rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclock wise from center 4 Press the ESC OFF switch four times within twenty seconds 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink sev eral times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 7 to re enable HSA functionality Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the app
379. r will be damaged parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that Shifting Into NEUTRAL N the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing to prevent damage to internal recreational towing parts NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 489 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 Press and hold the brake pedal 4 Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission 5 Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL N 6 Start the engine 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 8 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear 10 Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition switch in the unlocked ACC position 11 Firmly apply the parking brake 12 Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear NOT in Neutral CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK
380. rac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performan
381. ract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY
382. railer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency 486 STARTING AND OPERATING M Cooling System Air Conditioning To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Turn off temporarily heating take the following actions Highway Driving Reduce speed RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Four Wheel Drive Models Ground See Instructions e Automatic transmission in PARK Flat Tow e Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL N e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 487 Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Four Wheel Drive Models Ground Dolly Tow NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OnTalr AR OR Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Continued NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into NEU e Tow only in the forward direction Towing this TRAL N automatic transmission must be shifted into
383. raining System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is desig
384. rating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped RW FF Auxiliary Mode Refer to Video Entertainment System VES for fur No function ther details SET Button Auxiliary Mode Dolby No function Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Dis M DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin list
385. rd have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary compact spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 438 STA
386. re fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 2 Engage header latches 035907427 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Install rear corner panels 4 Install side and back windows UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Lowering The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Quarter Window 2 2 Bow 7 Check Strap 3 3 Bow 8 Front Retainer Quarter Window 4 Sail Panel 9 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 5 Body Side Retainer 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Zipper Start Zipper Finish Swing Gate Bar Swing Gate Brackets Sail Panels O14 WN HM NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft loops on the windshield top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door ON window by opening the door and lifting the half door ie window out Nee NOTE Stow the half door wi
387. read lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow Shift into first gear manual transmission or DRIVE auto matic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion NS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 CAUTION e Water ingestion into the axles transmission trans fer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at a depth of 30 inches 76 cm at speeds no greater than 5 mph 8 km h Water ingestion can occur causing damage to your vehicle Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water
388. read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and c
389. remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the
390. ress the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase
391. riance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M display Upon reset the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position Elapsed time is displayed as follows hours minutes seconds
392. rips mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use MOPAR Con vertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support the top from underneath It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure RINSING Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by directed at the weather strip seals may cause water rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to leak into the vehicle s interior to allow the top to dry before lowering it Careless handling and storage of the removable CAUTION roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton clot
393. risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 CAUTION CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always fe
394. rmally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command vr button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command amp vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the hea
395. rning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air
396. road mode press the SWAY BAR switch again 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped NOTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove the two nuts from the bodyside ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 ee Ee Em ae _ u rr 404 STARTING AND OPERATING
397. roblem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The
398. ropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles 428 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE Anytime the ESC system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by apply ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also
399. rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Inspect all door latches for presence of grease reapply if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 24 000 miles 39 000 km Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect all door latches for presence of Inspect the transfer case fluid grease reapply if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect exhaust system damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedu
400. rt Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission If MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Equipped ATF 4 product Manual Transmission If MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the re Equipped quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 226 RBI Model 44 MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only
401. s Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the p
402. s a collision 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and stow the seat belt extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the steering wheel The Advanced Front Passenger Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The letters SRS are embossed on the air bag covers 022633796 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multi
403. s equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage
404. s used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the hve button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 37 4 6 tt Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with th
405. se in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Position This range is used for normal street and highway driving on hard surfaced roads 4H Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Start ing and Operating for further information 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for lo
406. se or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to 16 Digit Character exit setting tone balance and fade Program Type Display MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information YP News News Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following e 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit None 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 16 Digit Character Program Type Display By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to
407. se the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjustment 030933898 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle located on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat push downward on the handle to lower the seat 030907408 Seat Height Adjustment 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i Front Seatback Recline WARNING Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Lift the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the handle to return the seatback to an upright position shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Front Passeng
408. section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Xe button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the es button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EVR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the wo button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatical
409. set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures erin 646024 emo Hae dees 376 W Manual Transmission If Equipped 380 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 376 DOMINO P H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 376 GO Downshifting O Normal Daring 2232 594 P eee eee HER 377 E Reverse SODIUM uua adeps iub p Rote d 383 O Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or W Automatic Transmission If Equipped 383 de IE OE OIE GT E Key Ignition Park Interlock 385 Se Nee Ramen a case dd O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 386 ered SINUM aa EE ee O Five Speed Automatic Transmission 386 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 379 Lear RANGES ora xd v ede es see eee sg EX 387 372 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id ll Four Wheel Drive Operation Command Trac I9 Or Rock Trae s aoa dade mes O Operating Instructions Precautions O Shift Positions O Shifting Procedure W Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped Bl Axle Lock Tru Lok Rubicon Models N Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect If Equipped ll On Road Driving Tips ll Off Road Driving Tips O Side Step Removal If Equipped o The Basics Of Off Road Driving O When To Use 4L Low Range O Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Ela MO amp 6454 bs LE 405 O Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 405 O Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High l OMS
410. sion The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at a
411. sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued 454 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Use chains on P225 75R16 rear tires only P255 75R17 WS SNENG EED GIOCO P255 70R18 and LT255 75R17 tires do not provide e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate clearance adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings that only chains in good condition are used Bro TIRE CHAINS ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the Tire chains may be installed on all models except the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could Sahara and Rubicon Install chains on rear tires only indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged Follow these recommendations to guard against damage parts of the chain before further use and excessive tire and chain wear Continued
412. ssing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 CAUTION Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any Uconnect phone system supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat j cole candle n OPPrAN TL OE 75 get into the BTSA mode press either AUX button on damage the device Follow the device manufactur je ds the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth er s guidelines Streaming Audio Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device Play Mode in the vehicle can cause damage to the device When switched to BTSA mod
413. stage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate t
414. start when enough new distance and fuel data is accumulated e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START positions The elapsed timer displays minutes seconds After 59minutes 59seconds it displays hours minutes seconds Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Trip Display Button Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy ELECTRONIC VEHICLE I
415. ster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Installing The Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a te
416. stomer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 Or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group 586 LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list o
417. sults in tire failure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and in loss of vehicle control satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob areas are affected by improper tire pressure lems You could lose control of your vehicle Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left 446 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures Tire pressure should be checked
418. t Adjustment Button ment button located on the base of the head restraint Rear Head Restraints and push downward on the head restraint The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head re straints Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on child seat tether routing NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models NOTE e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback forward Rear Seat Release 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward Removing The Rear Seat Two Door Models WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Folding Rear Seat In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure that the seats 4 Raise the rear seatback using
419. t side of the steering wheel ON OFF GANGFI 2 RES 3 SET 1 ON OFF 4 CANCEL NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or nor
420. t the above steps NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Sound Horn On Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the RKE transmitter PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transm
421. t with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result NS TA TING AND OPERATING 449 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size des
422. tandard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 464 STARTING AND OPERATING ee To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number wi
423. tempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 398 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Failure to engage a position completely can cause On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have a collision Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs panel to the left of the steering column between the two rear wheels the differential automati cally proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction STARTING AND OPERATING 399 To activate the system press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate
424. ter air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand EVR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous st
425. termine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the left will downshift the transmission activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right will change the top available gear To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster STARTING AND OPERATING 393 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D_ Actual Gear s Allowed NOTE To select the pro
426. the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 4 3 2 1 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 388 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued
427. the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tone
428. the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service 18 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 19 Cruise Indicator CRUISE TUS indicator shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on 20 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 21 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver I
429. the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith
430. the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice
431. the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled 2 The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h and the transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK 3 The driver door is opened 4 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child
432. ther strap having a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The rear seating positions have lower anchor SS ages capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments and child seats with fixed lower attachments The rear seat lower anchors can be readily identified by the symbol located on the seatback directly above the anchorages NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 7
433. thorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ont
434. thout MMT Gasoline blended with MMT has shown to reduce sparkplug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi cated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel in Federal and California NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 465 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Fed eral law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not t
435. til the engine has been running for about 10 seconds control is set to panel or panel floor e MAX A C e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb For maximum cooling turn on the A C and recirculation ing the mode control selection buttons at the same time e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK e ECONOMY MODE position the recirculation feature will be cancelled If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn Air Conditioning Control OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler u i li MIL inni MTHTITHL tji RE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Operation of the system is quite simple eee 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating EE the Temperature Control knob Once BSS the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati ss5s ssss Cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditi
436. tion against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet NOTE Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 2 Release header latches from the windshield frame EE EEE a ace 1 Remove the side and back windows 81925984 036007477 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 3 Fold header rearward pulling the fabric to the rear 035963570 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Release Sunrider latch both sides 035963573 A NOTE Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of 5 Open the swing gate and
437. tion other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 433 vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeratio
438. to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and sd then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near sd If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and d In very cold weather pim if you need extra heat at the windshield
439. to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h NNS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 421 The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during WARNING Continued the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the m regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a The ABS cannot prevent collisions including low humming noise during operation this is normal those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro WARNING planing e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by
440. trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 444 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Ocoupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 130 Ib T Occupant 3 160 Ibs 865 Ibs us 670 EE 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 WARNING Safety WARNING Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that re
441. trained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the a collision lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out Vehicles With Rear Web Buckles That May Need To Be Twisted Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 miles 800 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided Trailer tow is not recom mended during break in period The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle op
442. trap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle 036207426 Zo RR Closing The Sunrider Perform the above steps in the opposite order NOTE Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rearview mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed an
443. tur Gauge ois soas Sees EES De 277 Engine Oil VISCOSIDY sa ees eked Rg Si Re ede ees 520 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ie oos aed tae a 520 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 68 Entry System Illuminated 5 o gcc HER DROL LN 21 Izd PCT 463 Event Data Roeotder covuweduacounce BED edd ua 22 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 88 466 lbiscuc e c DI 68 526 Extender beat Belt 24 ERR 60 EXtenor Pinch Cate aas urs des REM DERS DE 541 Ellenor LONG xaxa e wee tas vc RE Rs raspi 91 Iabr ct M 2222 9252 9444 RXRZ 3 543 545 PADEC TOP PET 545 Filters fat NE errre ereere 521 N INDEX 595 DEE ODQINOIDI 25 tax 2X VPE os 369 PONSON ee ee ee re 520 Fil EL ooba o2 s ac Aaa eee ee ne esas 541 Flashers Hazard Varning a vd Soe ach dea Ee rod ARE 492 TOO Signal ox a xcd EKS PRE O1 273 556 PET Flooded Engin Staring aca be RAAR BE OR 977 Puid Capacwies 24h s4048se5 00en sane tee ees 558 Plone Leiks sosio be os Gece Bees Va SERS EE 92 Fluid Level Checks eres 540 Automatic Transmission 536 Eie ne OU D 518 Manual Transmission s 539 LOW iet Cs qose debe wer ED 417 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 559 ed oo ie se AAR EE EN EE dod eee en Db POC ICUS Cm 156 557 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 147 POMS Board uico oe E DERE AR e EEIE 149 Folding Windshield iis sr RS be WE ER RD MEOS 257 Four Wheel DYE 2424206656 G45 036 hoes Rpt 394 SUIS rrr tee ee es
444. untr Countr News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM oe If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 16 Digit Character Display Program Type Program Type 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between subtitles to different subtitle languages that are the following items available on the disc if equipped NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to switch to different audio languages if supported on select an entry and make changes the disc if equipped e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll equipped up and down the menu if equipped NOTE e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between e The available selections for each of the above entries gt playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by var
445. up shift speeds may not apply em mei Shift Speeds in MPH KM H 3 6L 34 47 55 76 SERIE NOTE ina speeds shown in the chart above are 2H and 4H only vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi cantly less 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Downshifting CAUTION Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds TORNING CAUTION Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a aae TE EE N ET EE shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear Selec tion Maxi mum Speed 6 to 5 5 to 4 2 to 1 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 NOTE Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi cantly less 4to3 3to2 Reverse Shifting
446. urity Alarm is armed To Disarm The System To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung ers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors N o THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED NOTE The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the e The fro
447. ushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the
448. ushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a warmed up engine has been shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months Identification Symbol whichever occurs first This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends
449. uts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501 NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING ie Positive Battery Post Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode
450. val 4 2 aur s 187 D Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 226 O Rear Hard Top Installation 190 D Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 229 W Door Frame sos tee yess ete sess 191 3 Folding Down The Soft Top 232 0 Door Frame Removal 26 45 04 2 80 ge see go 192 Jaime Up The ol Top ins aq oh aa coe HE 242 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 ll Sunrider Two Door Models iP Bduipped ee este os 251 Opening The Suntider 744445 do s eae 252 HCl sine The Sunrider ss ek ERLA vues 254 N Sunrider Four Door Models IP SQUID DEG si bes been SOLO ate ee DA 254 HO penis Tie Sunrider qe vue caen epewees 255 Closing The Sunrider speke SEE HER 257 Bl Folding Windshield 207 O Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars O Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars ll Rear Window Features Hard Top Only o Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped o Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day posit
451. ver the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 7 Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top 9 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and of the front of the rear door frame Ensure the seals are then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other installed correctly to avoid water leaks side 035834059 8 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B pillar 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS Please visit the owners section of Jeep com for instruc tional videos CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating
452. vious memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command EVR Setup button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup you may say on of the the following commands following Save to save the memo e Change to setup Continue to continue recording e Switch to system setup Delete to delete the recording e Change to setup e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos e Main menu setup or During the playback you may press the Voice Command VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands In this mode you may say the following commands e Switch to setup Repeat to repeat a memo e Language English Next to play the next memo e Language French N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command om button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Vo
453. w fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints fo
454. wall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures EE STARTING AND OPERATING 441 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location Tire Placard Location Two Door Models 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard TEER ES ARIE PERE E ERO o Fs A NE S E Do rh Rof SF SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must n
455. wer Window Switches Four Door Models 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie REAR SWING GATE NOTE Close the rear flip up window before attempting The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key to close the swing gate hard top models only Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors CAUTION To open the swing gate press the button on the gate Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the handle rear flip up window as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are oper ating the vehicle 021834613 Gate Handle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except t
456. wer side hex bolt 13 mm The lower side bolt will not align until the top two bolts are installed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 819292p7 E i p p 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts 6 Reinstall the wiper arms 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY KJ Rotate the switch upward to the first detent posi tion for rear wiper operation Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to located on the right side of the steering column controls activate the rear washer The washer pump and the the operation of the rear wiper washer function wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release the wiper will cycle two to three times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The rear window
457. y Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Locker Blue Module PCM Trans Yellow MS Range m EE NECEM Yellow Natural Equipped 30 Amp mE Front Wiper LO HI MG 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Pink Yellow Rain Sensor 20 Amp mM Front Rear Washer M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Blue Yellow BATT ACC SE Lp Spare LECT M1 15 Amp Center High M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat Blue Mounted Stop Light Yellow CHMSL Switch M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If Stop Lamp Feed Yellow Equipped 20 Amp Relay Trailer Lighting Yellow _ Stoplamp MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse M10 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Blue Vehicle Entertainment Yellow Cabin Compartment System Satellite Digi Node Wireless Con tal Audio Receiver trol Module SIREN SDARS DVD Multifunction Control Hands Free Module Switch RADIO Antenna 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export Universal Garage Yellow Only CL eed ME Opener Vanity M15 20 Amp v dem Control Sys dd Yellow tem Rear View Mir 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw ror Cabin Compart Red Climate Control Sys ment Node Transfer tem Underhood Case Switch Multi Lamp Function Control 30 Amp Amplifier Switch Tire Pressure Green Monitor Glow Plug Module Export Die sel O
458. y be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration KO nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is
459. y gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable s
460. y the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating And Air Conditioning Blower Control ii Jr Il il s 045607535 Pp Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of up outer rotary dials and inner push knobs SSSSE7535 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser
461. ying time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder
462. you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier 414 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous
463. ystem If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC 27 O D Overdrive OFF Indicator Light system will be ON even if it was turned off previously 0 0 This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off The O D OFF button is located on the center console e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 28 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front nmm WARNING prd sway bar is disconnected The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci 29 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5 trol ESC is off
464. zero NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display ECO 665 044 oe oe eee bees Fuel Saver Indicator 016 Se a vou ee aed dea ee ee Door Ajar CALE sist 5 465448 eaneee ne ee Swing Gate Ajar LOW BtE 226222233 3393 Low Tire Pressure HOTOIL Transmission Oil Temperature Above Normal Limits PASCI acts S tutes e prs eo oo US Fuel Cap Fault NOPUSE os mad dee SR d RR RR ad Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles HOTOIL Transmission Temperature Warning Message The HOTOIL cluster message will appear in the odom eter accompanied with a chime to indicate that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might oc cur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this HOT OIL message turns on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the message turns o

2012 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents